272
DT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

  • Upload
    doannga

  • View
    215

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

DT730/DT710/DT330/DT310USER’S GUIDE

NEC Corporation2011 August

NWA-039300-001ISSUE 5.0

Page 2: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions,or features, at any time, without notice. NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees andcustomers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Cor-poration and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval fromNEC Corporation. All brand names and product names on this documentare trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyright 2008-2011

NEC Corporation

Page 3: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1

2

3

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. INTRODUCTIONFACE LAYOUT ................................................................................... 1KEYS AND PARTS............................................................................. 9MENU KEY ......................................................................................... 12SIMPLE OPERATION BY MENU KEY AND CURSOR KEY.............. 16ICON DISPLAY................................................................................... 16SHORTCUT MENU ............................................................................ 17PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE KEYS................................................. 19SOFT KEYS........................................................................................ 218LD Display......................................................................................... 25CONDITIONS FOR DT700 SERIES................................................... 30

.INSTALLATION PROCEDUREADJUSTING ANGLE OF TILT LEG.................................................... 31TO REMOVE TILT LEG...................................................................... 32TO ATTACH TILT LEG ....................................................................... 32CONNECTING LAN CABLE ............................................................... 33CONNECTING LINE CORD ............................................................... 34INSTALLING DIRECTORY CARD...................................................... 35ATTACHING HANDSET ..................................................................... 35INSTALLING/REMOVING KEY SET UNIT ....................................... 36WALL MOUNTING ............................................................................ 37

.TERMINAL SETUPSETUP WITH UP/DOWN KEY ........................................................... 41SETUP WITH FEATURE KEY............................................................ 42SETUP WITH MENU KEY FOR DT700 SERIES ............................... 46SETUP WITH MENU KEY FOR DT300 SERIES ............................... 94

Page 4: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

4

5

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

.BASIC OPERATIONTO LOGIN .......................................................................................... 100TO LOGOUT ...................................................................................... 100TO MAKE AN EXTERNAL CALL........................................................ 101TO MAKE AN INTERNAL CALL ......................................................... 103TO ANSWER AN EXTERNAL CALL .................................................. 105TO ANSWER AN INTERNAL CALL ................................................... 107MULTILINE APPEARANCE................................................................ 108TO HOLD A CALL ............................................................................. 108TO PLACE A CALL ON EXCLUSIVE HOLD .................................... 109TO TRANSFER A CALL ..................................................................... 109HOW TO INPUT CHARACTERS ....................................................... 111SECURITY MODE ............................................................................. 125EMERGENCY CALL .......................................................................... 127XML APPLICATION ........................................................................... 128 SCREEN POP-UP ............................................................................ 130

.FEATURE OPERATION TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SELECTIVE DIALING(DYNAMIC DIAL PAD, PRESET DIAL) .............................................. 133TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPEED CALLING(ONE-TOUCH SPEED CALLING KEYS)............................................ 134TO REGISTER NAME ON ONE-TOUCH SPEED CALLING KEY ..... 137TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPEED CALLING - STATION/GROUP ........................................................................... 137TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPEED CALLING - SYSTEM......... 137ACCOUNT CODE ............................................................................. 139FORCED ACCOUNT CODE............................................................... 139

Page 5: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AUTHORIZATION CODE ................................................................... 139VOICE CALL ..................................................................................... 140TO ANSWER A VOICE CALL HANDS FREE .................................. 141AUTOMATIC INTERCOM................................................................... 141MANUAL INTERCOM......................................................................... 142DIAL INTERCOM .............................................................................. 143CONFERENCE ................................................................................. 144TO ESTABLISH A BROKER CALL..................................................... 144TO ANSWER A CAMPED-ON CALL.................................................. 144CALL WAITING - ORIGINATING........................................................ 145CALL PARK ...................................................................................... 147CALL PICK-UP (GROUP)................................................................... 148CALL PICK-UP (DIRECT)................................................................... 148OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING ......................................................... 149OFF-HOOK TRUNK QUEUING.......................................................... 149EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE.................................................................... 149LAST NUMBER REDIAL .................................................................... 150CALL FORWARDING - ALL CALLS ................................................... 150CALL FORWARDING - BUSY LINE ................................................... 152CALL FORWARDING - DON’T ANSWER .......................................... 153LOGGED OUT IP STATION - CALL DESTINATION ......................... 154CALL BACK ...................................................................................... 156TO SAVE AND REPEAT A NUMBER ................................................ 156TO LEAVE A MESSAGE .................................................................... 158TO ANSWER A MESSAGE ................................................................ 158VOICE MAIL SYSTEM........................................................................ 159MEET-ME PAGING ............................................................................ 159PAGING TRANSFER.......................................................................... 160BOSS/SECRETARY TRANSFER....................................................... 162

Page 6: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

6

7

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BOSS/SECRETARY - MW LAMP CONTROL .................................. 162BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE ....................................................... 163DO NOT DISTURB ........................................................................... 164CALL REDIRECT .............................................................................. 165PRIVACY .......................................................................................... 166PRIVACY RELEASE........................................................................... 167PHONEBOOK ................................................................................... 168CALL HISTORY ................................................................................ 178

.DIRECTORY OPERATIONTO ADD NEW DATA ......................................................................... 183TO CHANGE GROUP NAME ............................................................ 191TO FIND A REGISTERED DATA ....................................................... 193TO MAKE A CALL FROM DIRECTORY............................................. 207TO ADD PREFIX TO NUMBER ......................................................... 208TO EDIT DIRECTORY DATA ............................................................ 211TO DELETE ALL DATA ..................................................................... 212TO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA ....................................................... 213

.CALL HISTORY OPERATIONFOR DT730 SERIES ........................................................................... . 217TO VIEW CALL HISTORY ................................................................. 217TO MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HISTORY ....................................... 218TO ADD CALL HISTORY DATA TO DIRECTORY ............................ 220TO EDIT DIRECTORY DATA FROM CALL HISTORY ...................... 222TO DELETE ALL DATA ..................................................................... 225TO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA ....................................................... 226

FOR DT330 SERIES ........................................................................... . 228

Page 7: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

8

9

1

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TO VIEW CALL HISTORY ................................................................. 228TO MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HISTORY ....................................... 231TO DELETE ALL DATA ..................................................................... 232TO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA ....................................................... 233

.SPECIFICATIONSTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................... 235

.MENU LISTMENU LIST FOR DT730 SERIES ...................................................... 237MENU LIST FOR ITL-8LDE-1............................................................. 245MENU LIST FOR DT710 Series ......................................................... 252MENU LIST FOR DT330 Series ......................................................... 255

0.WEB PROGRAMMINGOUTLINE ............................................................................................ 257TO LOGIN........................................................................................... 258TO LOGOUT....................................................................................... 260HOW TO OPERATE ........................................................................... 262

Page 8: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

This page is for your notes.

Page 9: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

1FAC

264

[mm

]

1

. INTRODUCTION

E LAYOUTITL-8LD-1 (DT730 Series) DTL-8LD-1 (DT330 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall FeautreFeature

Answer Mic

Scroll

Exit Help

Redial

264

[mm

]

179 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Scroll

Exit Help

Redial

179 [mm]

Page 10: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

258

[mm

]

2

ITL-32D-1 (DT730 Series) DTL-32D-1 (DT330 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

258

[mm

]

205.8 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

205.8 [mm]

Page 11: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

258

[mm

]

3

ITL-24D-1 (DT730 Series) DTL-24D-1 (DT330 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

258

[mm

]

179 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

179 [mm]

Page 12: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

258

[mm

]

4

ITL-12D-1 (DT730 Series) DTL-12D-1 (DT330 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

258

[mm

]

179 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

179 [mm]

Page 13: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

258

[mm

]

5

ITL-12PA-1 (DT730 Series) DTL-12PA-1 (DT330 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Line

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

258

[mm

]

193 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Line

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

193 [mm]

Page 14: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

Not

225

[mm

]

6

ITL-8LDE-1 (DT710 Series) ITL-6DE-1 (DT710 Series)

e: ITL-8LDE-1 supports functions equivalent to ITL-8LD-1 (DT730 Series).

1ABC2

GHI4

JKL5

MNO6

PQRS7

TUV8

WXYZ9

0 #

DEF3

7

3

4

5

6

8

11

2

Hold Speaker

Redial

Recall Feature

Answer

Exit Help

Mic

Menu

Transfer

179 [mm]

225

[mm

]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

179 [mm]

Page 15: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

225

[mm

]

7

DTL-6DE-1 (DT310 Series) ITL-2E-1 (DT710 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Exit Help

Recall Feature

Redial Conf

Directory

Mic

Message

Answer

225

[mm

]

179 [mm]

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Redial Conf

Directory

Mic

Message

Answer

179 [mm]

Page 16: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

8

DTL-2E-1 (DT310 Series)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Redial Conf

Directory

Mic

Message

Answer

225

[mm

]

179 [mm]

Page 17: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

KE

• K

This takin

nfor-ration.

y al. mp

eries Key

the

is played pro-

up on

Line ny

“One-e keys, e num-

9

YS AND PARTS

EYS AND PARTS ON ITL-24D-1

subsection explains keys and parts of DT Seriesg ITL-24D-1 as an example.

(1) Security Button (DT730 only)You can prevent unauthorized access and imation leakage from terminal by simple ope

(2) Call Indicator LampLamp at the top corner of DT Series Displaflashes when a call terminates to the terminAlso, when using Voice Mail service, the Lalights when a message has been left.

(3) LCDLCD (Liquid Crystal Display) provides DT Sactivity information plus date, time and SoftOperation.

(4) ExitTo exit Menu or Help mode and go back to time display.

(5) Soft KeysAny feature shown at the bottom of the LCDavailable. The appropriate feature key is dison the screen according to the call handlingcess.

(6) HelpExplanations of the Soft Keys can be calledthe LCD by pressing this key.

(7) Programmable KeysThese keys can be programmed as Flexiblekey/Programmable Feature Key by TelephoServer Administrator. When Telephony Server Administrator setsTouch Speed Dial key” on the programmablyou can assign any numbers (ex. Telephon

(1) (2)

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PQRS

8TUV

9WXYZ

0 #

Menu

HOLD Transfer Speaker

Recall Feature

Answer Mic

Exit Help

Redial

(16) (15) (14)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(5)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

Page 18: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

b

*T

*Ay

(8) RP

(9) FUfD

(10)Ww

(11)Pl

(12)Ta

(13)Bv

ver vol-

sation.

.

roup)edial been ed,

r ORY

ia, Latinions]: #, Hong

OWN key)

IGHT key)

WN) key

10

er, etc.) to the key (up to 32 digits).

For the assignment of the keys, contact your elephony Server Administrator.

* When two telephone numbers are assigned on side and B side of “One-Touch Speed Dial key”, ou can switch the side by PAGE key (Soft key).

ecallress key to finish the call and hear the dial tone.

eaturesed to activate any features as terminal setup

unctions, etc. and to program One-Touch Speed ial Keys.

Answerhen LED on this key is lit, press key to answer a aiting call.

Micress key to respond hands free. LED on this key

ights during speakerphone operation.

Menuo access the local menu of DT700 Series, such s Call History, Directory or Terminal Setting.

Cursory using this key, DT Series user can access to arious features with simple operation.

Details on Cursor key

(a) Up/Down( DOWN UP)Used to adjust LCD contrast, speaker/receiume, and ringer volume.

• LCD Contrast:Press ( ) or ( ) key while idle.

• Speaker/Receiver Volume:Press ( ) or ( ) key during conver

• Ringer Volume:Press ( ) or ( ) key during ringing

(b) Redial(Last Number Call, Speed Calling-Station/GPress key to activate redial feature. Press rand scroll back through numbers that havedialed. When the desired number is displaypress the or # key to activate dialing.

(c) DirectoryPressing this key opens Directory menu. Fodetails on Directory service, see 6.DIRECTOPERATION.

Note: A-law Countries [Europe, Australia, RussAmerica, Middle near East, other Asian natµ-law Countries [North America, JapanKong, Taiwan]:

Enter Key

(4-way Scroll D

(4-way Scroll RDirectory key

(4-way Scroll UP key)

(4-way Scroll LEFT key) Redial key

Volume (UP) key

Volume (DO

(a)

(b)

(a)

(c)

(d)

Page 19: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

(Dqsd

At

(14)CHL*mm

(15)At

al call

d DTL-

oup)edial been

DTL-

on key

-1 and

fea-

-1 and

ia, Latintions]: #n, Hong

11

d) EnterT730/DT330 Series has shortcut menu for fre-uently-used features. Use this key to display the hortcut menu (see SHORTCUT MENU) and etermine the selected item in the menu.

lso, this key is used as cursor-movement key on he Menu screen.

Speakerontrols the built-in speaker which can be used forands Free dialing/monitoring.ED on key lights when key is active. DT730/DT330 support for full duplex hands-free ode. DT710/DT310 are half duplex hands-free ode.

Transferllows the station user to transfer established calls

o another station, without attendant assistance.

(16)HoldPress this key to place an internal or externon hold.

• THE OTHER KEYS AND PARTS

Redial (only for DTL-2E-1, ITL-2E-1 an6DE-1)

(Last Number Call, Speed Calling-Station/GrPress key to activate redial feature. Press rand scroll back through numbers that havedialed. When the desired number is displayed, press the or # key to activate dialing.

Conf (only for DTL-2E-1, ITL-2E-1 and6DE-1) Press key to establish a conversation. LED lights when key is active.

Directory (only for DTL-2E-1, ITL-2EDTL-6DE-1)Press key to activate speed calling - systemture.

Message (only for DTL-2E-1, ITL-2EDTL-6DE-1)Press key to access the voice mail system.

Up Move the highlighted area one line up the screen.

Down Move the highlighted area one line down the screen.

Left Go back to the previous screen.

Right Go to the screen which corresponds to the highlighted menu item.

Enter Go to the screen which corresponds to the highlighted menu item.

Note: A-law Countries [Europe, Australia, RussAmerica, Middle near East, other Asian naµ-law Countries [North America, JapaKong, Taiwan]:

Page 20: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

UD(Uu

lication

currentayed ind Menutem di-

XML

12

p/Down (only for DTL-2E-1, ITL-2E-1 andTL-6DE-1) DOWN UP)

sed to adjust LCD contrast, speaker/receiver vol-me, and ringer volume.• LCD Contrast:

Press ( ) or ( ) key while idle.• Speaker/Receiver Volume:

Press ( ) or ( ) key during conversation.• Ringer Volume:

Press ( ) or ( ) key during ringing.

MENU KEYFrom the key, you can use various appfeatures such as Directory and Call History.

To Display Menu List

STEP 1: Press key while indicating the time on LCD. The Menu List is displLCD. Use Cursor Key to select desireItem. You can also select the Menu Irectly using digit keys.

Main Menu for DT730 Series(Firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later without

application)

Menu

Menu

History

Directory

Setting

Phone

Page 21: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

(

Not

e of

y: Con- set. For CTORY

olled by ails, see apter 5.ry: Con-al XML please admin-

ML ease

ars only used.r ringing , and

P R

13

Main Menu for DT730 SeriesFirmware version 5.0.0.0 or later with XML

application)

e: XML application is supported from firmware ver-sion 5.0.0.0 or later. For details, see XML APPLI-CATION in Chapter 4.

Menu Item Digit key to select Description

History

To view Call History. There are two types of Call History features. On the one hand, the history data is stored in the server (system) memory. On the other hand, the history data is stored in the memory of the telephone (see 7.1FOR DT730 SERIES in chapter 7Call History Operation).

History

Directory

Setting

Portal

Service

1

Directory

To use Directory features.There are thfollowing three types directory features.

• Personal Directortrolled by telephonedetails, see 6.DIREOPERATION.• Phonebook: Contrthe system. For detPHONEBOOK in ch• Corporate Directotrolled by the externserver. For details, contact the systemistrator.

Service

To access external Xserver. For details, plcontact the system administrator.

Note: This icon appewhen XML service is

Setting

To control settings fovolume, LCD displayMusic on Hold.For details, see SETUWITH MENU KEY FODT700 SERIES.

Menu Item Digit key to select Description

2

3

4

Page 22: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

)

reen of

the e other

o types e hand, rver nd, the

ry of the RIES in

14

Main Menu for DT730 Series(Firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0

Phone To switch from Main Menu to the Portal screen or Phone screen (time indication screen).

• When Home URL is registered, Portal icon ap-pears.• When Home URL is not registered, Phone icon ap-pears.

For details, please contact the system administrator.

Portal

XML-1

To display XML application 1 screen. History or Directory screen being used is treated as an application. This icon is displayed when an XML application starts with a new window.

XML-2

To display XML application 2screen. This icon is displayedwhen an XML applicationstarts with a new window.

XML-3

To display XML application 3screen. This icon is displayedwhen an XML applicationstarts with a new window.

Phone Soft Key 1

To switch from application screen to phone screen (Time Indication screen).

Home Soft Key 2

XML application screen registered in the home URL is displayed. When the home URL is not registered, Home URL icon is not displayed.

Return Soft Key 4

To close the main menu and go back to the previous screen.

Menu Item Digit key to select Description

5

6

7

8

Note: A Portal screen is the home (entrance) scthe phone. When you use multiple XML applications, the URL that is registered ashome URL is the Portal screen: this is wherXML applications can be accessed.

Menu Item Description

History

To view Call History. There are twof Call History features. On the onthe history data is stored in the se(system) memory. On the other hahistory data is stored in the memotelephone (see 7.1FOR DT730 SEchapter 7Call History Operation).

12

Tool

[Menu]

3456#0

Call Func. SettingPresenceFavoriteConfig

Directory

OKBack↓

History

1

Page 23: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

D

T

C

S

P

F

C

M

2

3

4

5

6

#

0

server.

t

tting of t the

e 7Call

tails,

e, LCD

U KEY

t have

15

Main Menu for DT710 Series

Main Menu for DT330 Series

irectory

To use Directory features.There are the following three types of directory features.

• Personal Directory: Controlled by tele-phone set. For details, see 6.DIRECTO-RY OPERATION.• Phonebook: Controlled by the system. For details, see PHONEBOOK in chap-ter 5.• Corporate Directory: Controlled by the external XML server. For details, please contact the system administrator.

ool

- Uses when accessing external XML server. For details, please contact the system administrator.- Uses when sending/receiving Instant Message (Not used).

all Func. Currently Not Used (grayed out).

ettingTo control settings for ringing volume, LCD display, and Music on Hold.For details, see SETUP WITH MENU KEY FOR DT700 SERIES.

resence Currently Not Used (grayed out).

avorite Currently Not Used (grayed out).

onfigThis item is used for Configuration setting of DT Series. For details, please contact the system administrator.

enu Item Description

10 Config

OKBack↓

Tool

Menu Item Description

Tool

- Uses when accessing external XMLFor details, please contact the systemadministrator.- Uses when sending/receiving InstanMessage (Not used).

ConfigThis item is used for Configuration seDT Series. For details, please contacsystem administrator.

Menu Item Description

Call HistoryTo view Call History. For details, se7.2FOR DT330 SERIES in chapterHistory Operation.

Directory To use Phonebook function. For desee PHONEBOOK in Chapter 5.

SettingTo control settings for ringing volumdisplay, and Music on Hold. For details, see SETUP WITH MENFOR DT300 SERIES.

Note: DTL-6DE-1/ITL-2E-1/DTL-2E-1 does noMenu key.

Note: Unavailable Menu items are grayed out.

1

0

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

SettingsDirectoryCall History

1

2

3

Page 24: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

SIMANBy uaccewith

As aacce

isplays events

9 WXY

#

Spea

e is a hecked

n of ou have ill

ntly sor key.

16

PLE OPERATION BY MENU KEY D CURSOR KEYsing key and key, DT Series user canss Call History, Directory and terminal settingssimple operation.

n example, the following operations show how toss the Directory menu.

ICON DISPLAYThe LCD of DT730 Series/DT330 Series dDesktop Icons which provide notification when(such as missed call and voice mail) occur.

Menu

GHI

Z Menu

ker

Answer Mic

Redial

Press Menu key

Press Directory key

2 Directory

1 Hisotry [Menu]

2 System 1 Personal [Directory]

3 Tool

Up Down Back OK

Up Down Back OK Up Down Back OK

Feature Icon Description

Missed CallThis icon appears when thermissed call. Once you have cthe missed call, this icon willdisappear.

Voice MailThis icon provides notificatioincoming Voice Mail. Once ychecked the mail, this icon wdisappear.

Cursor This icon indicates the curreavailable direction of the Cur

Encryption This icon appears when the conversation is encrypted.

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Icon Display

DND >>>MIC

VM

Page 25: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

SHAs sSerieYou (Ente

Note

Shor

showsom the

menu

presst key.

d.

Not

M

V

IM

P

B

GH

9WXYZ

#

Speaker

R

1

2

3

4

5

e Mail.

17

ORTCUT MENUhown in the figure below, DT730 Series/DT330s has Shortcut Menu for frequently-used features.can access to Shortcut Menu by pressing

r) key.

: DT710 Series/DT310 Series do not supportthe Shortcut Menu.

tcut Menu includes the following features.

Shortcut Menu for DT730 Series

Shortcut Menu for DT330 Series

As an example of DT730 Series, the followinghow to view the log data of missed call frShortcut menu.

STEP 1: Press (Enter) key. The Shortcutscreen is displayed on LCD.

STEP 2: Select Missed Calls and then(Enter), (Right-cursor) or OK sof

STEP 3: The log data of the last call is displaye

e: Unavailable Menu items are grayed out.

Feature Description

issed Calls Access history of Missed Calls.

oice Mail Access history of incoming Voice Mail.

Currently Not Used (grayed out).

resence Currently Not Used (grayed out).

luetooth Currently Not Used (grayed out).

I

Menu

Answer Mic

edial

Press Enter Key

[Shortcut Menu]

2 Voice Mail3 Receive IM

Back OK

1/21 Missed Calls: 2

Feature Description

Missed Calls Access to history of Missed Call.

Voice Mail Access to history of incoming Voic

1

2

1

12

Receive IM

[Shortcut Menu]

340

PresenceBluetooth

Voice Mail

OKBack↓

Missed Calls

Page 26: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

STE

Not

Not

Not

Not

18

P 4: Press (Enter) key while displaying the logdata for the target telephone number on LCD.

e: If two or more records exist, use or ↑/↓ softkey to display the next/former records.

e: For unanswered incoming calls, will be dis-played on the left of the name.

e: If you make/answer a call to/from the telephonenumber which is registered to Personal Directory,the corresponding name will be displayed as callhistory data.

e: While the log data is displayed, you cannot makea call by dialing a telephone number.

1

[Missed]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 10:00Ken Kobus

7205

Page 27: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

PRThespresfeatuOtheadm

AICMPres

DICMPres

DNDPres

FDAPresCalls

FDBPres– Bu

FDNPres– Do

MICMPres

MSGPresansw

MULA prosee s

n

on

umber.

tion.

ouch

isplay:

19

OGRAMMABLE FEATURE KEYSe are examples of DT Series features available by

sing the programmable keys. Some features usingre access code may be programmed by the user.rs must be programmed by the telephone systeministrator.

:s key to activate “Automatic Intercom”.

:s key to activate “Dial Intercom”.

(Do Not Disturb):s key to activate or cancel “Privacy” feature.

:s key to activate or cancel “Call Forwarding – All ” feature.

:s key to activate, verify, or cancel “Call Forwarding sy Line” feature.

:s key to activate, verify, or cancel “Call Forwarding n’t Answer” feature.

:s key to activate “Manual Intercom”.

(Message):s key to leave message indication at station in no er or busy condition.

TILINE APPEARANCE:grammable extra extension key. Press this key to tatus of extra extension.

MW-SET:Press key to leave message waiting indication oboss’ station from secretary’s station.

MW-OFF:Press key to cancel message waiting indicationboss’ station from secretary’s station.

P-RLS:Press key to release “Privacy” feature.

S&R (Save and Repeat):Press key to store a number or redial a stored n

SIG:Press key to cause chime at predetermined sta

NAME:Press key to register name for the key to One-TSpeed Calling key.

RVERS:Press key to reverse the black and white in its dbackground, characters and icons.

Page 28: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

LEDProgEmitthe a

FunFeatFeatFeatFeatFeatFeatFeatFeatincomlight FeatPad,

Not

20

rammable Feature keys have a built-in Lightting Diode (LED) that lights or flashes according toctivity of that Feature key.

ction Key Activitiesure + 0 = Side Tone On/Off. (for handset)ure + 1 = Turns microphone on or off.ure + 2 = Adjusts handset receiver volume.*ure + 3 = Selects ringer tone.*ure + 4 = Adjusts transmission/receiving volume.*ure + 5 = Activates hands-free operation.*ure + 6 = Deactivates hands-free operation.*ure + 7 = Turns call indicator lamp on or off for

ing call notification. (If turned off, this lamp will stillto indicate message waiting.)ure + 8 = Selects between Normal, Dynamic Dial and Preset Dial.

e: * indicates the services which are not availablefor DT700 Series.

Page 29: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

SOThe functof thprovindivbottofunctnampattethe skey i

Exit Prestime

HelpPresinfor

MIC Presdeacillum

DNDPres

ding togs are on the

istereddividual

Not

21

FT KEYSSoft Keys on the DT Series provide a set ofions on the LCD that adapt to the changing statee telephone. While default Soft Key settings areided, desired functions can be assigned toidual stations as required. The Soft Keys, at them of the LCD, can display the names of availableions, names of user-assigned functions andes of functions assigned by a specific Soft Keyrn. Displayed Soft Keys can vary, depending ontate of the phone and/or when the Next/Previouss pressed.

Keys to exit Menu or Help mode and go back to thedisplay.

Keys the Help Key, then desired Soft Key for helpfulmation about that key.

(Microphone)s the Soft Key below "MIC" to activate ortivate the Microphone. LED on MIC key willinate when MIC is on.

(Do Not Disturb)s the Soft Key to reject call termination to the

preassigned station.

Default Displays for Each StatusDefault Soft Key settings are provided corresponparticular functions. Different Soft Key settindisplayed at the bottom of the LCD dependingstatus, as shown below.

Different patterns of Soft Key settings can be regfor individual call status and assigned to interminals as required.

e: Soft Key function is available for the terminalswith LCD.

7:354051

>>>MIC AM MON 12 JUL 2010

Exit Help

DND4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

MIC >>>DND

DIAL TONE/DIALING

IDLE

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010MIC >>>PICK

(1)

Push >>>

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010FDN >>>FDB

FDA

(2)

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010MIC >>>VOICE

RINGING

Page 30: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

SoftWhenamblinkfeatuspec

erns of

diately

n to be or idle

n)ropriateATIONtered is

ering ainto the

cominge busyanswer

CALL as the

er andNot

BU

CO

(

(

CO

22

Key Featuresn the Soft Key corresponding to a desired featuree is operated, the selected feature name starts to on the LCD. The blinking display of availableres takes precedence over the display of featuresified by the Soft Key pattern.

The following shows the default display pattmain features.

FDB (Call Forwarding - Busy Line)Permits a call to a busy station to be immeforwarded to a predesignated station.

FDA (Call Forwarding - All Calls)Permits all calls designated for a particular statiorouted to another station regardless of the busystatus of the called station.

FDL (Logged Out IP Station - Call DestinatioEnables a system to transfer the call to appstation when Dterm whose LOGGED OUT IP ST- CALL DESTINATION has already been regisin logout status.

E-OVR (Executive Override)Enables selected station users, upon encountbusy condition at an internal station, to bridge busy connection.

CW (Call Waiting)Enables a busy station to receive a second incall. A camp-on indication tone is sent to thstation, and you can use a switchhook flash to the second call.

CB (Call Back)Provides the ability for a calling station to set aBACK. The calling station will be rung as soonbusy station becomes available.

S&R (Save and Repeat)Allows a station to save a specific dialed numbthen redial that number later.

e: The Soft Keys can be programmed in SystemData to blink, remain steady, have no indication,or display a character when either in use or idle.

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010TRANSFER 2000

MIC >>>CONF

SY

NSULTATION HOLD

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010BUSY 2000

MIC >>>CB1)

Push >>>

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010BUSY 2000

S&R >>>

CW

2)

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 20102000

MIC >>>DND

NNECTION

Page 31: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

MWSAllowlamp

HOLPermretur

MWOAllowor la

PICKPermothe

CONEnabconfealrea

VOICEnabspeacan c

S-SPAllownumthan

CASAllowoutsi

UCDAllow

wardedoes not

only.

Speedgroup.

ey andaged in

ion line

for use

umbers.

ing the

23

ET (Message Waiting - Set)s a station to set a Message Waiting indication or.

D (Call Hold)its a station user to hold a call in progress and to

n to the previously held call.

FF (Message Waiting - Cancel)s a station to cancel a Message Waiting indication

mp.

(Call Pickup - Group)its a station user to answer any calls directed to

r lines in the user's preset Call Pickup Group.

F (Three-way Calling)les a station user to establish a three-wayrence by connecting an additional party to andy existing conversation.

E (Voice Call)les you to make a call to the called party's built-inker. If the called party's MIC is on, the called partyonverse on hands-free.

D (Speed Calling - System)s a station user to call certain frequently dialed

bers using fewer digits (abbreviated call codes) would normally be required.

(CAS-Switch Hook Flash)s you to send a switchhook flash while on an

de trunk.

BO (UCD Busy Out)s a station user to block UCD calls and to cancel

Busy Out.FLASH (Flash)Provides the station with a switchhook flash.

FDN (Call Forward - No Answer)Permits a call to an unanswered station to be forto a predesignated station if the called station danswer within a predetermined period of time.

C-RPT (ISDN Malicious Call Trace)Allows you to initiate a Call Trace on ISDN calls

G-SPD (Speed Calling - Group)Allows a station user to share a set of commonCalling numbers with other station users in the P-RLS (Privacy Release)Allows another station to depress a busy line kenter the conversation of a station already engcommunication.

DND (Do Not Disturb)Allows a station user to deny access to the statfor incoming calls.

MIC (Microphone On/Off)Allows you to turn the microphone on and off with the speakerphone.

PAGE (Button Page)Allows you to toggle between pages when two nare registered on One-Touch Speed Calling key

HSET (Headset)Allows you to go off- and on-hook when usheadset.

Page 32: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

RLSAllohea

SIGPerpredfrominte

CKEAlloall i

SCAAlloexteannto d

IZPAlloof th

IDCAlloalte

GPIAlloexp

CHCAlloconano

ser is incovering

ringing.

display:

24

(Release Key)ws you to release the current call when using thedset, without waiting for the party to hang up.

(Manual Signaling)mits station users to send a one-second ring to aetermined station. If the signaled station is ringing another call, the manual intercom signal will

rrupt that ringing.

EP (Eight-Party Conference Retrain)ws all outside parties to stay on a conference whennternal parties hang up.

LL (Serial Call)ws you to set Serial Call for the caller beforending the call, allowing the caller to receive anouncement at the end of the call guiding the callerial the next number and subsequent numbers.

(Internal Zone Paging)ws a user to make a voice call through the speakerse designated group.

HG (Call ID Change Display)ws you to toggle between standard display and anrnate display.

CK (Call Pickup - Group Enhancement)ws you to answer any ringing station within youranded call pickup group.

NF (Call Hold - Conference)ws a station user to establish a conferencenection by adding a third party, who is held onther line, to the existing two-party connection.

VISIT (Survivable Remote MGC)Allows a station to indicate a status: when a uremote office, VISIT will be blinking. After rethe main office, VISIT will return to light.

RMUTE (Ringer Mute)Allows a station user to mute or recover station

RVERS:Allows you to reverse the black and white in itsbackground, characters and icons.

>>> (Display Function Next Page)Allows you to scroll to the next screen.

<<< (Display Function Previous Page)Allows you to scroll to the previous screen.

MIC DND RVERS >>> 1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

MIC DND RVERS >>> 1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 33: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

8LD88

DDp8mpst

WTybUCO

*T

, etc.)

25

DisplayLD Display is available for DTL-8LD-1, ITL-LD-1, and ITL-8LDE-1.

TL-8LD-1/ITL-8LD-1/ITL-8LDE-1TL-8LD-1/ITL-8LD-1 provides 32 (8 keys x 4 ages additional programmable keys) keys, ITL-LDE-1 provides 8 keys (Flexible Line/Program-able Feature key)). Also, information set to each rogrammable key is displayed on DESI-less creen. For setting of the programmable key, con-act Telephony Server Administrator.

hen Telephony Server Administrator sets “One-ouch Speed Dial key” on the programmable keys, ou can assign any numbers (ex. Telephone num-er, etc.) to the key (see TO ORIGINATE A CALL SING SPEED CALLING (ONE-TOUCH SPEED ALLING KEYS) and TO REGISTER NAME ON NE-TOUCH SPEED CALLING KEY).

For the assignment of the keys, confirm to the elephony Server Administrator.

GHI

Scroll

1

2

3

4

BENRACHEL JULIA

PaulJAMES

HANNAH

FDA

FDN

(a) (b) (C) (b) (a)

Scroll

7:25 AM WED 29 JUN 2011

MIC DND >>>

Time Indication Screen

DESI-Less Screen

(Indicates current time information, call information, and Soft Keys

DTL-8LD-1/ITL-8LD-1

Page 34: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

(Stf

(In

IT shing ttern-

link

ady Lit

26

a) Icontatus information on the Line key such as Call

ermination, Call Hold or Busy can be indicated as ollowing Icons.

Scroll

Switch1

ABC2

GHI4

JKL5

MNO6

PQRS7

TUV8

WXYZ9

0 #

DEF3

7

3

4

5

6

8

11

2

Hold Speaker

Redial

Recall Feature

Answer

Exit Help

Mic

Menu

Transfer

Scroll

BENRACHEL JULIA

PaulJAMES

HANNAH

FDA

FDN

(a) (b) (b) (a)

7:25 AM WED 29 JUN 2011

MIC DND >>>

Time Indication Screen

DESI-Less Screen

dicates current time information, call information, and Soft Keys, etc.)

L-8LDE-1 User Status Icon FlaPa

• Idle No Icon• Call Hold(Individual Hold/Individual Hold on Call Park Group)

B

• Call Hold(Other Party Hold/Other Party Hold on Call Park Group)• Recall (Individual Hold/Exclusive Call Hold/Call Transfer/Individual Hold on Call Park Group)

• Receiving an Incoming Call

• During Conversation (Individual Use)• Call Transfer• Conference

Ste• During Conversation (Other Party Use)• Active Feature (Under a setting of feature key like a “Call Forwarding”)

Page 35: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

(Pl

(Dbrpu

.

Line

OneSpee

Feat

Not

Not

1

2

3

4

minatedeing dis-utomati-ou mustwer the

y No. 5y No. 6y No. 6y No. 8

y No. 21y No. 22y No. 23y No. 24

Page 3

omingll

ss twice.

27

b) Programmable Key Informationrogrammable Key Information displays the fol-

owings.

c) Page Icon (DTL-8LD, ITL-8LD only)ESI-less screen has four pages (8 programma-le keys per page). Page Icon key indicates cur-ently displayed page. You can switch the rogrammable key display from page 1 to 4 by sing Scroll key.

Example: Page Turning by Scroll Key

Key DescriptionMaximum

digits to be displayed

Key - Name and Number informa-tion 8 digits.

-Touch d Dial Key

- Speed Dial Name Informa-tion- Number Information

8 digits.

ure Key - Feature Name 6 difits.

Programmable Key 1-8

Black background indicates currently displayed page.

Programmable Key 9-16

Programmable Key 17-24

Flashing indicates page with event happening.

Programmable Key 25-32

e: The icon flashes during events such as call termi-nation to a line key or call back.

e: For ITL-8LDE-1, DESI-less screen has only onepage. Thus, Page Icon is not displayed.

Note: For example, when an incoming call is terto a line key on Page 3 while Page 1 is bplayed on the screen, the screen is not acally switched from Page 1 to page 3. Ydisplay Page 3 manually and then ansincoming call.

Scroll

Scroll

BENRACHEL LINDA

PAUL012345

HANNAH

FDA

FDN

Key No. 1Key No. 2

Key No. 3Key No. 4

KeKeKeKe

MICHAELPETER

JULIA

JAMES

POWELL

Switch Page

Key No. 17Key No. 18

Key No. 19Key No. 20

KeKeKeKe

Press Feature Key 22 onto answer incoming call.

Page 1

Page 3IncCa

Pre

Flashing

1

2

3

4

12

3

4

Page 36: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

(Tm

Afu

TOk

W

N*SIK

code

h REG-LLING

SI-less

ication

ESI-less screen

the Tele-

28

d) Programmable Key Indicationhe following shows LCD indication of Program-able keys.

ppropriate icons are displayed according to the eature. These displays cannot be changed by ser.

he following shows each LCD indication when ne-Touch Speed Dial key is set to Programmable ey.

hen Station line/Trunk line are assigned.

o icons are displayed. You can register name on each One-Touch peed Dial key. For the procedures, see TO REG-

STER NAME ON ONE-TOUCH SPEED CALLING EY.

When any features using feature accessare assigned.

Black square icons are displayed.* You can register name on each One-ToucSpeed Dial key. For the procedures, see TOISTER NAME ON ONE-TOUCH SPEED CAKEY.

(e)Scroll Key

DTL-8LD-1, ITL-8LD-1

This key is used to turn over the page of DEscreen.

ITL-8LDE-1

This key is used to switch over time indscreen and DESI-less screen.

OR

OR

Note: For firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later, Dscreen can be switched to time indicationby the following operations.- When you originate a call- When you receive a call- When you operate a Feature key

For details of the above, please confirm to phony Server Administrator.

Page 37: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

Not

29

e: The following key operations are not availablewhile DESI-less screen is displayed.- Soft Key- Help Key- Exit Key

- Right-cursor key and Left-cursor key

Page 38: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1.

COPleaKey

• Fe

• Fe

• Fe

• Fe

• Fe

• Fe

e menud. For MONI-

30

NDITIONS FOR DT700 SERIESse note that following terminal settings (by Feature+ Digit Key) cannot be used for DT700 Series.

ature+0 =Side Tone On/Off (for handset)For the settings, contact the Administrator.* You can confirm the settings in “Audio&Visual Set-tings” → “Side Tone Volume” of Online Monitoring.

ature+2 =Adjusts handset receiver volumeFor the settings, contact the Administrator.* You can confirm the settings in “Audio&Visual Set-tings” → “Audio Settings” → “Receive Bias”/“Re-ceive Gain” of Online Monitoring.

ature+3 =Selects ringer toneFor the settings, contact the Administrator.* You can confirm the settings in “Audio&Visual Set-tings” → “Audio Settings” → “Ring Settings” of On-line Monitoring.

ature+4 =Adjusts transmission/receiving volumeFor the settings, contact the Administrator.* You can confirm the settings in “Audio&Visual Set-tings” → “Audio Settings” → “Receive Bias”/“Re-ceive Gain”/“Send Gain” of Online Monitoring.

ature+5 =Activates hands-free operationNot Available

ature+6 =Deactivates hands-free operationNot Available

Note: When pressing and holding Help key, thof "Online Monitoring" will be displayedetails on Online Monitoring, see ONLINETORING in Chapter 10.

Page 39: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

2AD

The

STE

STE

, adjustw until

DT7

pper

31

. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

JUSTING ANGLE OF TILT LEG

angle of the tilt leg can be adjusted in four levels.

TO RAISE TILT LEG

P 1: Turn the telephone set upside down.

P 2: Adjust the tilt leg in the direction of the arrowuntil you hear it click.

• TO LOWER TILT LEG

STEP 1: Turn the telephone set upside down.

STEP 2: While lifting the center of the stopperthe tilt leg in the direction of the arroyou hear it click.

30/710 DT330/310

First Level

Second Level

Third Level

Fourth Level

Tilt Leg

StoTilt Leg

Page 40: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

STE

the ap- set.

(c and

e stop-tilt leg.

DT7

32

REMOVE TILT LEG

P 1: Turn the telephone set upside down.

P 2: Lower the tilt leg to first level.

P 3: Remove the indicated portions (a and b) ofthe stopper from grooves (A and B) on the tiltleg and then widen the tilt leg.

P 4: While pushing the two hooks, slide the tilt legdownward. Remove the tilt leg from the termi-nal.

TO ATTACH TILT LEG

STEP 1: Turn the telephone set upside down.

STEP 2: Align the hooks (c-h) of the tilt leg overpropriate slots (C-H) of the telephone

STEP 3: Slide the tilt leg upward until the hooksb) click into place.

STEP 4: Fit the indicated portions (a and b) of thper into the grooves (A and B) on the

30/710 DT330/310

Stopper

a

A B

b

Tilt Leg

d

c

DT730/710 DT330/310

f

g c

d

h

e

E C G

F D H

a

A B

b

Page 41: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CO

STE

STE

STE

STE

DT7

T

LA

lephone

d

Adapter

33

NNECTING LAN CABLE

P 1: Prepare 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-T/TX cables(Straight) for connecting the telephone to net-work device such as HUB, PoE Switch.

P 2: Connect the telephone to the network deviceusing the LAN cable.

P 3: Thread the LAN cable through the groove onthe back of the telephone.

P 4: When AC adapter is used to supply power tothe telephone, connect the AC/DC adapter tothe telephone as shown below.

30/710

elephone

To LAN

Groove N Straight Cable

To PC

Te

AC Adapter Plug AC Adapter Cor

Groove

Connector for AC

Page 42: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CO

STE

STE

STE

DT3

Telep

Telpe

Cord

34

NNECTING LINE CORD

P 1: Insert Line cord plug into Line connector onthe back of the telephone set until you hear itclick.

P 2: Thread the line cord through the groove onthe back of the telephone.

P 3: Lead the line cord out through the groove onthe tilt leg as shown in the figure below.

30/DT310

Line Cord Line Cord Plug

Line Connector

hone

Line Code Groove

hone

Tilt Leg

Groove

Line

Page 43: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

INS

A dirtabledirecnumcard

STE

STE

NDSETne until

ove asNot

DT7

iled Cord

oove

ANDSET onnector

dular Plug

35

TALLING DIRECTORY CARD

ectory card (also known as an abbreviated dialing) can be attached to the telephone sets. Thetory card can be used to record often dialedbers or other important information. Directorys are available as options.

P 1: Remove the protective sheet from the cover.

P 2: Attach the cover to the directory card andthen attach it to the directory card holder.

ATTACHING HANDSET

STEP 1: Insert the coiled cord plug into HAconnector on the back of the telephoyou hear it click.

STEP 2: Thread the coiled cord through the groshown in the figure below.

e: To remove the directory card, pinch the two sidesof the directory card holder inward until the tabsrelease and pull the holder out of the grooves.

30/710 DT330/310

Cover

Directory Card

Holder Grooves

DT730/710 DT330/310

Telephone

Co

Gr

HC

Mo

Page 44: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

INSUN

STE

STE

STE

STE

STE

el until

Lin

Butto

ey Card

36

TALLING/REMOVING KEY SET IT

TO REMOVE KEY SET UNIT

P 1: Insert a tapered rod lightly into the right sideof the line key panel/button panel.

P 2: Lift out the line key panel/button panel to re-move it from the telephone.

P 3: Remove the line key card.

TO INSTALL KEY SET UNIT

P 1: Align the holes in the line key card with thebuttons on the telephone.

P 2: Align the holes in the line key panel/buttonpanel with the buttons on the telephone and

then push the four corners of the panthe panel clicks into place.

DT730/710 DT330/310

e Key Panel

n Panel

Line Key Card

Line K

Line Key Panel

Button Panel

Page 45: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

WAA watelepside

To mspac

se the

upside

t once.e hang-

nd wid-

or the

e wall

ws (in- WM-Ls (pur-all.

WA

SpaceModu

37

LL MOUNTING

ll mount unit (WM-L UNIT) is used to mount allhones to the wall. This unit connects to the backof the telephone.

ount the telephone set on the wall, the followinge is required.

To mount the telephone set on the wall, ufollowing procedure.

STEP 1: Mount the hanger of the handset down.

Remove the hanger from the handseTurn it upside down and then insert ther until you hear it clicks.

STEP 2: Turn the telephone set upside down aen the tilt leg.

STEP 3: Attach WM-L UNIT to the wall directlywall plate.

- When attaching WM-L UNIT to thdirectly:

Secure WM-L UNIT with the six screcluded with the telephone set) or hangUNIT on the wall with the two screwchased separately) inserted into the w

RNING Be careful not to drop the telephone set while mounting it on the wall. It can cause injury.Make sure the telephone set is firmly mounted on the wall to prevent the telephone set from falling out. It can cause injury.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Telephone

Tab Slots

for lar terminal

117.5

136

25 (approximately)

15 (approximately)

35 (approximately)

30 (approximately)

83.5 60

60

(In the case of 12D/24D)

All dimensions in mm

Handset Hanger

Telpehone

Page 46: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

The Serie

- In- In

LA

STE

ith thector.

onnec- the ex-.

ove on the fig-

WM-L UN

inal

inal

38

- When attaching WM-L UNIT to the wall plate:

Attach WM-L UNIT to the posts on the wallplate as shown in the figure below.

remainder of the procedure varies between DT300s and DT700 Series.

the case of DT300 Series: Go to the next step. the case of DT700 Series: Go to Step 8 after theN cable is connected to the telephone.

P 4: Attach the modular terminal to the wall asshown in the following figure. If the modularconnector is attached directly on the wall orthe wall plate is used instead of modular ter-minal, skip this step.

STEP 5: Insert the line cord plug (included wtelephone set) into the modular conne

STEP 6: Insert the line cord plug into the LINE ctor on the back of the telephone. Wrapcess cord and secure it with a tie wrap

STEP 7: Thread the coiled cord through the grothe back of the telephone as shown inure below.

Wall Wall

Screws (suppulied)

Screws

IT WM-L UNIT

WM-L

Posts

Switch box

Wall WM-L

Modular Term

Line Code

Modular Term

Page 47: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

W

L

WM-L

Tabs

39

P 8: Insert the four tabs on WM-L UNIT in the tabslots on the back of the telephone.

Tuck the excess cord into WM-L UNIT.

all

ine Cord

Line Connector

Telephone

Groove

Modular Plug

Wall

Tab Slots

Page 48: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

40

This page is for your notes.

Page 49: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

3This termkey,

Variopasskey.

SET

• TV

Presstatu

LCD

during

ging.

41

. TERMINAL SETUP

chapter describes operating procedures forinal settings by the Up/Down ( or / )

key and key.

us terminal settings such as display, sounds,word, and language are also available from

UP WITH UP/DOWN KEY

O ADJUST HANDSET RECEIVER OLUME

s Up/Down ( or / ) key in the off-hooks or during the call.

indication for North America, Latin America, Asia, Middle East and Russia

LCD indication for Australia

• TO ADJUST SPEAKER VOLUME

Press Up/Down ( or / ) key speakerphone operation or during the call.

• TO ADJUST RINGER TONE

Press Up/Down ( or / ) key during rin

Feature Menu

Menu

DT730/710 DT330/310

HANDSET

HANDSET

DT730/710 DT330/310

SPEAKER

DT730/710 DT330/310

RING

Page 50: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

Presstatu

For 5.0.0controf asettin

Wide

Narr

built-in

IC Dis-

isplays

ate be-

Not

D

42

O ADJUST LCD CONTRAST

s Up/Down ( or / ) key in the on-hooks.

DT730 Series/ITL-8LDE-1 with firmware version.0 or later, an adjustment range of the LCDast is available in 2 types (Wide/Narrow). The typedjustment range depends on the configurationg.

Setting

ow Setting

SETUP WITH FEATURE KEY

• MICROPHONE ON/OFF

LED on key shows the status of the microphone.

STEP 1: Press soft key associated with the Mplay or press and key.

• TO CHANGE HANDSET RECEIVERVOLUME

Handset receiver volume can be changed.

STEP 1: Press and key. The LCD dthe current volume status.

STEP 2: Press and key to alterntween Large and Small volume.

e: For the details of configuration setting, pleasecontact the system administrator.

T730/710 DT330/310

LCD

LCD

LCD

DT730/710 DT330/310Mic

Feature 1

DT330/310

Feature 2

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010RCV VOL. SMALL

Feature 2

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010RCV VOL. LARGE

Page 51: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TDT Sselec

STE

N

Not

43

O SELECT RINGER TONE eries has 10 kinds of ringer tones that you cant.

P 1: Press and key. The LCD displaysthe selected tone number (n=1 ~ 10).

o. Frequency (Hz) Modulation (Hz)1 520/660 162 520/660 83 1100/1400 164 660/760 165 Melody 16 Melody 27 Melody 38 Melody 49 Melody 5

10 Melody 6

e: Tone number 5, 6, 8~10 (Melody 1, 2, 4~6) willsound continuously.

DT330/310

Feature 3

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010RINGER TONE n

Page 52: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TI

Hand

STE

STE

• TTo S

STE

To SSTE

ither on

isplays:

ic Dial

d as a turned

44

O ADJUST TRANSMISSION/RECEIV-NG VOLUME set volume can be changed.

P 1: Press and key. The LCD displaysthe current volume.

P 2: Press and key again to alternatebetween Large and Small volume.

O ACTIVATE HANDS-FREE et Hands-Free On:

P 1: Press and key. The LCD displays:

et Hands-Free Off:P 1: Press and key. The LCD displays:

• CALL INDICATOR LAMP ON/OFF

You can choose to turn the call indicator lamp eor off during ringing.

STEP 1: Press and key. The LCD d

• SELECT DIAL MODE

You can select one pattern from Normal, DynamPad or Preset Dial to originate a call.

When only Dynamic Dial Pad is activated:

DT330/310

Feature 4

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010T/R VOL. SMALL

Feature 4

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010T/R VOL. LARGE

DT330/310

Feature 5

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010HANDS FREE ON

Feature 6

Note: The call indicator lamp lights when useMessage Waiting Lamp, even when it isoff by the above operation.

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010HANDS FREE OFF

DT730/710 DT330/310

Feature 7

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010INDICATOR ON

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010INDICATOR OFF

DT730/710 DT330/310

Page 53: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To S

STE

Whe

To S

STE

ial are

ressed,s:

Not

Not

is ON.

45

et/Reset Dynamic Dial Pad

P 1: Press and key. The LCD displays:

n only Preset Dial is activated:

et/Reset Preset Dial

P 1: Press and key. The LCD displays:

When both Dynamic Dial Pad and Preset Dactivated:

To Set Dial Mode

STEP 1: Every time and key are pDial Mode switches. The LCD display

e: When this feature is ON, you may initiate a callby immediately dialing the number and the sta-tion will go hands-free off-hook automatically. Fordetails, see TO ORIGINATE A CALL USINGSELECTIVE DIALING (DYNAMIC DIAL PAD,PRESET DIAL).

e: When this feature is ON, you may initiate a callby pressing Speaker Key or going off-hook afterdialing the number. For details, see TO ORIGI-NATE A CALL USING SELECTIVE DIALING(DYNAMIC DIAL PAD, PRESET DIAL)

Feature 8

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Direct Dial Pad ON

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Direct Dial Pad OFF

Feature 8

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Preset Dial ON

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Preset Dial OFF

Note: It means that Dial Mode displayed on LCD

Feature 8

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Dial Mode: Direct

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Dial Mode: Preset

4:26 PM MON 12 JUL 2010Dial Mode: Normal

Page 54: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

SETDT7

• TR

The hook

STE

STE

STE

Off-

ons.ss ,

Not

1

46

UP WITH MENU KEY FOR 00 SERIES

O ENABLE/DISABLE OFF-HOOK INGING

procedure below shows how to enable/disable Off- ringing.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Incoming Call.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Offhook Ring (DT730) / hook Ring (DT710)Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key (DT730) / key (DT710)

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

1

1

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

Talk

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming Call

Usability

2

2 1

12

Headset Ring

[Incoming Call]

3456

Ring Tone

Headset Ring VolumeOKBack↓

Illumination

Ring VolumeOffhook Ring

Page 55: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

ble the

etting.

ons.ss ,

Not

Not

.0.0.0,

T730

47

P 5: To disable/enable the off-hook ringing, selectDisable or Enable.

Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

• TO SET RINGING OF HEADSET

The procedure below shows how to enable/disaringing of headset.

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: Default setting is 2 Enable.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

1 2

[Offhook Ring]

OKBack

12

DisableEnable

↓Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5

Back is displayed instead of Menu.

D

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

Page 56: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

set, se-

s.ss

r OK soft

48

P 3: Select Incoming Call.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 4: Select Headset Ring.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: To disable/enable the ringing of headlect Disable or Enable. Select an item by one of the following operation• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

1

1

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

Talk

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming Call

Usability

3

3

12

[Incoming Call]

3456

Ring Tone

Headset Ring VolumeOKBack↓

Illumination

Ring VolumeOffhook Ring

Headset Ring

Note: Default setting is 1 Disable.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

1 2

[Headset Ring]

OKBack

12 Enable

Disable

Page 57: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The tone

STE

STE

STE

Ring

ons.ss ,

ing theInter-

or inter-

Not

49

O SET RINGER TONE

procedure below shows how to change the ringer for internal call and external call.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Incoming Call.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Ring Tone (DT730) / Tone (DT710)Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key (DT730) / key (DT710)

STEP 5: Select External Call when settringer tone for external calls. Select nal Call when setting the ringer tone f

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

1

1

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

Talk

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming Call

Usability

4 2

4 2

12

[Incoming Call]

3456 Headset Ring Volume

OKBack↓

Illumination

Ring VolumeOffhook Ring

Headset RingRing Tone

12

Page 58: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

rks

ulationulation

ulationhonelationlation

50

nal calls.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press or key.

P 6: Select a desired tone type. You can previewdesignated ringer tone.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or OK soft

key.For example, press + to select

Download1.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

12

IM

[Ring Tone]

3Internal Call

OKBack↓

External Call

0 9

1 515

No. Menu ItemFrequency (Hz)

Rema1st 2nd

0 Automatic 520 660 16Hz mod1 Tone Type 1 520 660 16Hz mod2 Tone Type 2 520 660 8Hz mod3 Tone Type 3 1400 1100 Door P4 Tone Type 4 1100 No modu5 Tone Type 5 540 No modu

01

[External Call]

234567

Automatic

OKBack

Tone Type 1

89

16151413121110

17

Tone Type 2 Tone Type 3

Tone Type 10 Tone Type 11

Tone Type 5 Tone Type 4

Tone Type 6 Tone Type 7 Tone Type 8 Tone Type 9

Tone Type 12 Tone Type 13 Tone Type 14 Download 1 Download 2 Download 3

Page 59: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

678

9

1011121314151617

Not

Not

Not

Not

No.set me", one n the

51

Tone Type 6 1100 1400 16Hz modulationTone Type 7 660 760 16Hz modulationTone Type 8 1100 Envelope

Tone Type 9 -Door Phone

MelodyTone Type 10 - Melody 1Tone Type 11 - Melody 2Tone Type 12 - Melody 3Tone Type 13 - Melody 4Tone Type 14 - Melody 5Download 1 - DT730 onlyDownload 2 - DT730 onlyDownload 3 - DT730 only

e: When selecting Automatic or not performing this ringer tone setting, Tone Type 1 is automatically applied.

e: When selecting Automatic, the preview function will not operate. Also, when selecting Download 1/2/3, the ringer tone file must be downloaded in advance. If there is no downloaded file, you hear no tone.

e: Tone Type 1 to Tone Type 8:In the preview function, each ringer tone soundscontinuously. Actual ringer pattern of each tone isdetermined by the initial system settings.

e: Terminal settings may not become effective, according as the system settings. For details, contact the System Administrator.

Menu ItemFrequency (Hz)

Remarks1st 2nd

Note: You can set ringer tone for the telephone here. Ringer Tone type can be set for "Na"Group" and "Telephone set". The ringer Ttype set for "Name" has higher priority thatypes set for "Group" and "Terminal set".

Page 60: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TC

The patte

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

the illu-Selectination

Not

52

O SET ILLUMINATION PATTERN FOR ALL INDICATION LAMP

procedure below shows how to set the illuminationrn (color of Call Indicator Lamp).

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Incoming Call.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Illumination.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select External Call when setting mination pattern for external calls.

Internal Call when setting the illum

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

1

1

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

Talk

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming Call

Usability

5

5

12

[Incoming Call]

3456 Headset Ring Volume

OKBack

Ring VolumeOffhook Ring

Headset RingRing ToneIllumination

1

2

Page 61: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

function

ing thispplied.

53

pattern for internal call.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press or key.

P 6: Select a desired illumination pattern.You canpreview the designated illumination pattern.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key ( - key for ITL-8LDE-1).

• For DT730 Series

• For ITL-8LDE-1

1 2

12

[Illumination]

3 IMOKBack

External Call

Internal Call

0 9 0 5

Note: When selecting Automatic, the preview will not operate.

Note: When selecting Automatic or not performillumination setting, Red is automatically a

01

[External Call]

234567

Automatic

OKBack

Disable

89

RedGreen

YellowBlue

PurpleLight BlueWhiteRotation

01

[Illumination]

2345

Automatic

OKBack

Orange

RedGreen

Disable

Rotation

Page 62: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

disable

etting.

ons.ss ,

Not

.0.0.0,

54

• TO ENABLE/DISABLE RTP ALARM

The procedure below shows how to enable/RTP alarm.

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: You can set illumination pattern for the telephoneset here. Illumination pattern can be set for"Name", "Group" and "Telephone set". The illumi-nation pattern set for "Name" has higher prioritythan the patterns set for "Group" and "Terminalset".

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

Page 63: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss

OK soft

tem. ys-

inal

inal

he Sys-

55

P 3: Select Talk.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 4: Select RTP Alarm.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Select Automatic, Disable or En-

able (see the following table).Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or

key.

2

2

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Usability

1

1

12

[Talk]

345

OKBack↓

DTMF ToneKey Touch ToneHold MusicPrefix

RTP Alarm

0 1 2

Menu Items Descriptions

0 Automatic

Follow the setting on the SysIf no setting is made in the Stem, the default setting (Alarm=ON) is applied.

1 Disable Follow the setting on the term(OFF).

2 Enable Follow the setting on the term(ON).

Note: For the setting on the System, contact ttem Administrator.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

0 2

01

[RTP Alarm]

2

Automatic

OKBack

DisableEnable

Page 64: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The DTM

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

Not

D

56

O ENABLE/DISABLE DTMF TONE

procedure below shows how to enable/disableF Tone.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Talk.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select DTMF Tone.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

T730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

2

2

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Usability

2

2

12

[Talk]

345

OKBack↓

Key Touch ToneHold MusicPrefix

RTP AlarmDTMF Tone

Page 65: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Touchen the

ok.

etting.

ons.ss ,

ons.ss ,

M

0 Au

1 Di

2 En

Not

Not

.0.0.0,

57

P 5: Select Automatic, Disable or En-able (see the following table).Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or OK soft

key.

• TO SET KEY TOUCH TONE

The procedure below shows how to set KeyTone. Key Touch Tone is a tone generated whdigit keys are pressed while DT Series is off-ho

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Talk.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

enu Items Descriptions

tomatic

Follow the setting on the System. If no setting is made in the Sys-tem, the default setting (DTMF=ON) is applied.

sable Follow the setting on the terminal (OFF).

able Follow the setting on the terminal (ON).

e: For the setting on the System, contact the Sys-tem Administrator.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

0 1 2

0 2

01

[DTMF Tone]

2

OKBack

DisableAutomatic

Enable

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

2

2

Page 66: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

OK soft

setting

58

P 4: Select Key Touch Tone.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Select Automatic, No Tone, Toneor Voice.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.

• Press - key, and then press orkey.

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Usability

3

3

12

[Talk]

345

OKBack↓

Hold MusicPrefix

RTP AlarmDTMF Tone

Key Touch Tone

0 1 23

Note: When 0 Automatic is set, the default(Tone) is applied.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

0 3

01

[Key Touch Tone]

2

OKBack

No Tone

Tone

Automatic

3 Voice

Page 67: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The to be

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

an pre-

Minuet) nload

Not

59

O SET MUSIC ON HOLD

procedure below shows how to set Music on Hold heard by DT Series user.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Talk.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Hold Music.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select a desired Music on Hold. You cview the designated Music on Hold.

Select Default when the default data (is used as Music on Hold. Select Dow

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

2

2

12

Display

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Usability

4

4

12

[Talk]

345

OKBack↓Prefix

RTP AlarmDTMF Tone

Key Touch ToneHold Music

12

Page 68: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

hour or

etting.

ons.ss ,

ons.ss ,

Not

y only.our for-

.0.0.0,

T710

60

when a downloaded data is used as Music on Hold.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

• TO SET CLOCK FORMAT

Determines whether time is displayed with a 12-24-hour clock format.

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: You can preview the designated music on hold.When selecting Download, the music on hold filemust be downloaded in advance. If there is nodownloaded file, you hear no tone in the previewfunction (in actual operating conditions, “Minuet”is automatically applied.).

1 2

12

[Hold Music]

OKBack

Download

Default

Note: This setting is available for Time DisplaCall Log feature displays the time in 24-hmat regardless of this setting (DT730).

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/D

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

Page 69: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

ystem.

he Sys-

61

P 4: Select Time Format.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Make a selection from the following list.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or OK soft

key.

12

[User Setting]

3456

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

7 Usability

1

1

12

[Display]

3456

Back Light

LanguageOKBack↓

Font Size

Local VolumeScreen Saver

Time Format

0 2

Menu Item Meaning

0 AutomaticFollow the setting on the s(default)

1 12 hour Indication 12-hour clock2 24 hour Indication 24-hour clock

Note: For the setting on the System, contact ttem Administrator.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

01

[Time Format]

2

OKBack

12 hour Indication

24 hour Indication

Automatic

Page 70: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TD

Detevolumvolum

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

t.ons.ss

Not

62

O ENABLE/DISABLE VOLUME LEVEL ISPLAY

rmines whether or not to display the followinge levels: handset receiver volume, speakere, ringer tone volume and LCD contrast.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and press ,

or OK.• Press key.

P 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Local Volume.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Make a selection from the following lisSelect an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

2

2

12

[Display]

3456

Back Light

LanguageOKBack↓

Font Size

Screen Saver

Time FormatLocal Volume

Page 71: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

0 A

1 D

2 E

Not

63

• Press - key, and then press or OK soft key.

enu Item Meaning

utomaticEach volume level is displayed on LCD (default).

isableEach volume level is not displayed on LCD.

nableEach volume level is displayed on LCD.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

0 2

01

[Local Volume]

2

OKBack

Disable

Enable

Automatic

Page 72: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

Screcertawill bSavedownbe d

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

Not

Not

64

O SET SCREEN SAVER

en Saver works after the telephone is idle for ain period of time. The latest Screen Saver contentse displayed from XML server when the Screenr works. If the latest contents can not beloaded from XML server, default Screen Saver will

isplayed.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: For details on the XML service, contact the Sys-tem Administrator.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

Page 73: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

SaverStep 7,

999min)

65

P 4: Select Screen Saver.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Select Screen Saver Mode.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 6: Select either Disable or Enable.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

STEP 7: The display goes back to the Screenscreen. When Enable is selected Select Wait Time.Input Wait Time to launch the screen saver (1-and then press or OK soft key.

3

3

12

[Display]

3456

Back Light

LanguageOKBack↓

Font Size

Local VolumeScreen Saver

Time Format

1

1

12

[Screen Saver]

OKBack↓

Screen Saver Mode Wait Time

1 2

1 2

Note: Default setting is 1 Disable.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

Note: Default value is 120 min.

12

[Screen Saver]

OKBack

Enable

Disable

22

OKBackBK

1[Wait Time]Input wait time.

1201-999(min)

Page 74: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Thebac

Thesec

ST

ST

ST

tions.ress ,

No

66

TO ENABLE/DISABLE BACKLIGHT

following explains how to enable/disable theklights of LCD and digit keys.

backlights illuminate (for approximately 10onds) when you press any key or lifts the handset.

EP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

EP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

EP 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Back Light.Select an item by either of the following opera• Highlight an item by using , and then p

or OK soft key.• Press key.

te: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

4

4

12

[Display]

3456 Language

OKBack↓

Font Size

Screen Saver

Time FormatLocal Volume

Back Light

Page 75: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

1 D

2 En

Not

67

P 5: Make a selection from the following list.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

Menu Item Meaning

isableBacklights of LCD and digit keys are disabled.

ableBacklights of LCD and digit keys are enabled.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

12

[Back Light]

OKBack

Disable

Enable

Page 76: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The char

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

Not

68

O CHANGE CHARACTER SIZE

following explains how to change the displayedacter size on the LCD.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Font Size.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

5

5

12

[Display]

3456 Language

OKBack↓

Screen Saver

Time FormatLocal Volume

Back LightFont Size

Page 77: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

to be

etting.

ons.ss ,

ons.ss ,

Not

.0.0.0,

0

69

P 5: Select either “Standard(16dot)“ or “Small(12dot)“.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

• TO SET A LANGUAGE

The following explains how to set a languagedisplayed on LCD.

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Display.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

12

[Font Size]

OKBack

Small(12dot)

Standard (16dot)

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT71

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

3

3

Page 78: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

ons.ss

OK soft

anish.

70

P 4: Select Language (DT730) / Lan-guage (DT710)Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key (DT730) / key (DT710)

STEP 5: Select a desired language. Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or

key.For example, press + to select Sp

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

6 4

6 4

12

[Display]

3456

OKBack

Screen Saver

Time FormatLocal Volume

Back LightFont SizeLanguage

0 9

1 5 15

01

[Language]

234567

Automatic

89

JapaneseNEC English

NEC SpanishNEC FrenchGermanItalian

NEC Portuguese

DutchNorwegian

Page 79: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

71

P 6: After Making a selection, press or OKsoft key.

e: The enabled item is highlighted.

OKBack↓

16151413121110

1718192021

DanishSwedishGreek

Portuguese

FrenchSpanish

English

Polish

TurkishRussian

Romania

Catalan21 Catalan

Page 80: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

To cbelowocca

•••

STE

STE

STE

played. or

ss

Not anging000" as

72

O CHANGE PASSWORD

hange an existing password, follow the procedure. This password is used for the following

sions.

To lock/unlock the telephone.To delete the directory data.To reset the telephone settings.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Change Password.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: The Change Password screen is disEnter the old password and then pressSet soft key.

STEP 5: Enter the new password and then preor Set soft key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

4

4

Note: The initial password is "0000". When chthe password for the first time, enter "0the old password.

12

[User Setting]

34567

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

DisplayChange Password

Usability

New Pass

[Change Password]

OKCancelSetBK

1Old Pass

Retry Pass

Page 81: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

the fol-t case,

73

P 6: Enter the new password again and thenpress or OK soft key.

P 7: When the password entry completes suc-cessfully, the display changes as follows.Press or OK soft key.

e: A maximum of 32 digits (0-9, * and #) can be setas a password.

[Change Password]

OKCancelSetBK

1

Old Pass

Retry Pass

****New Pass

[Change Password]

OKCancelSetBK

1

Old Pass ****New Pass

Retry Pass****

Note: When the password entry ends in failure,lowing error message is issued. In thapress OK soft key and try again.

[Password]

OK

1Complete

[Password]

OK

1Password Error

Page 82: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TThe Help

STE

STE

STE

Not

Not

74

O SET USABILITYprocedure below shows how to set the operation of key while pop-up window is displayed.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Touch panel operation.• Highlight an item by using , and press ,

or OK.• Press .

P 3: Select Usability.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Touch panel operation.• Highlight an item by using , and press ,

or OK.• Press .

e: This feature is supported from Terminal FirmwareVersion 5.0.0.0.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

7

7

12

[User Setting]

34567

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

DisplayChange Password

Usability

Page 83: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STEs..

or

Nhich nuhich

indow

75

P 4: Select Help Key Mode.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Touch panel operation.• Press or OK.

• Press .

STEP 5: Select a desired mode of Help key.Select an item by one of the following operation• Touch panel operation, and press or OK• Highlight an item by using , and press

OK.• Press or , and press or OK.

1

1

1

[Usability]

OKCancel

Help Key Mode

No. ITEM DESCRIPTIO

1 Sub MenuSet the Help key w

displays sub me

2 Popup WindowSet the Help key wdisplays pop-up w

1 2

1

[Help Key Mode]

OKCancel↓

SubMenu2 Popup Window

Page 84: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The off th

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

or

Not

D

76

O RESET TELEPHONE SETTINGS

following explains how to clear the personal datae telephone.

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Setting Reset.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Enter the password and then press OK soft key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

T730/DT710

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKMenu↓

User Setting

0

0

2

[User Setting]

3456

0

Peripherals

OKBack

Security

Talk

DisplayChange Password

Setting Reset7 Usability

[Setting Reset]

OKBackBK

1Input a password.

Page 85: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

usic onloadingd to the

of theries.

nated is

direc- as the

etting.

ons.ss ,

tact the

10

77

P 5: Press or OK soft key to clear the person-al data of the telephone.

• TO DOWNLOAD A FILE

DT730 Series user can download files for MHold, Ringer Tone and Directory. When downthese files, the DT Series needs to be connectenetwork that has FTP (TFTP server).

Before starting the download, an IP AddressFTP/TFTP Server must be entered from DT Se

STEP 1: Set up the FTP/TFTP server.

<FTP server>Put the downloading file into the desigdirectory (for Windows IIS, the default“C:\InetPub\ftproot) of the FTP server.

<TFTP server>Put the downloading file into a desiredtory of TFTP server and then specify itdirectory for downloading.

STEP 2: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 3: Select Download.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

[Setting Reset]

OKBack

Are you sure?

Note: For details on the FTP/TFTP service, conSystem Administrator.

DT730/DT7

2

2

Page 86: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

nload

the

the

ons.ss ,

ons.

Not

78

P 4: Select Protocol.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Select a protocol used by the server whichstores the download file.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

STEP 6: The display goes back to the DowMenu screen.

When FTP is selected here, go to next Step (STEP 7).

When TFTP is selected here, go tonext STEP 15.

STEP 7: Select FTP Settings.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 8: Select User ID.Select an item by either of the following operati

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3

OKMenu↓

User SettingDownload

3

3

12

[Download Menu]

34 FTP Settings

OKBack↓

Download FilesDownload Address

Protocol

1 2

12

[Protocol]

OKBack

TFTP

FTP

1

2

4

4

12

[Download Menu]

34

OKBack

Download FilesDownload Address

ProtocolFTP Settings

1

Page 87: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

s, then

ettings

ons.ss ,

Not

e HOW Basic

79

• Highlight an item by using , and then press , or OK soft key.

• Press key.

P 9: Enter a User ID by using digit keys, thenpress or OK soft key.

P 10:The display goes back to the FTP Settingsscreen. Select Password.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 11:Enter a password by using digit keypress or OK soft key.

STEP 12:The display goes back to the FTP Sscreen. Select Folder.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: For details on character entry method, see HOWTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4 BasicOperation.

1

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

PasswordFolder

User ID

[User ID]

OKBackBK

AInput a user ID.

2

2

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

OKBackBK

A[Password]Input a password.

3

3

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack

User IDPassword

Folder

Page 88: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

serverample,

5, entersterisk

K soft

nloadiles.ons.ss ,

Not

80

P 13:Enter the directory where the download file isstored and then press or OK soft key.

P 14:The display goes back to the FTP Settingsscreen. Press or Back soft key to displaythe Download Menu screen.

P 15:Select Download Address.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 16:Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTPwhich stores the download file. For exto set the IP address of 10.41.208.2010*41*208*205 [separate with an a(*)].

After entering an IP address, press or Okey.

STEP 17:The display goes back to the DowMenu screen. Select Download FSelect an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: For details on character entry method, see HOWTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4 BasicOperation.

OKBackBK

A[Folder]Input a folder name.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

2

2

12

[Download Menu]

34 FTP Settings

OKBack↓

Download Files

ProtocolDownload Address

[Download Address]

OKBackBK

1‘*‘For‘.‘

. . .

1

1

Page 89: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

ss ,

.

ld, the

e, the

Whenfor MWhenfor rinWhenfor di

Not

ize

nds

81

P 18:Select a file to be downloaded.

P 19:When Ring Tone is selected at STEP 18,the following Ring Tone screen is displayed. Select either Download1, Download2or Download3.Select an item by either of the following operations.

• Highlight an item by using , and then pre or OK soft key.

• Press - key.

STEP 20:The default file name will be displayed

- When downloading a file for Music on Hodefault file name is “MOH.wav”.

- When downloading a file for ringer tondefault file name is “Melody1/2/3/.wav”.

downloading a file usic on Hold

:Select Hold Music and go to STEP 20.

downloading a file ger tone

:Select Ring Tone and go to STEP 19.

downloading a file rectory

:Select Directory and go to STEP 20.

e: DT710 can select 1 Hold Music only.

12

[Download Menu]

34 FTP Settings

OKBack↓

Download Files

ProtocolDownload Address

1

2

3

12

[Download Files]

3OKBack↓

Directory

Hold MusicRing Tone

2

1 23

File Format Maximum S

PCM µ-law 8kHz/s wav. under 32 seco

1 3

12

[Ring Tone]

3OKBack↓

Download3

Download1Download2

[Hold Music]

ExecCancelBK

AInput a file name.

MOH.wav

Page 90: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

- Wfile

STE

down- a file,rst and

mplete,

ad

P

Fil

Co

e HOW Basic

", "a-z",s a file

BK soft

s while

failure,e LCD.

82

hen downloading a file for Directory, the default name is “Directory.csv”.

When changing the file name, go to the next step (STEP 21).When not changing the file name, go to STEP 22.

P 21:Press BK soft key once to delete the defaultfile name and then enter a new file name byusing the digit keys.

STEP 22:Press or Exec soft key to start theloading process. While downloadingthe LCD displays “Downloading...” fithen “Saving...”.

STEP 23:After the downloading process is cothe display changes as follows:

The display goes back to the DownloFiles screen by Exit soft key.

File Format Maximum Size

CM µ-law 8kHz/s wav. under 32 seconds

e Name Directory.csv (Fixed)

de Unicode (UTF-8)

[Download1/2/3]

ExecCancelBK

AInput a file name.

Melody 1/2/3.wav

[Directory]

ExecCancelBK

AInput a file name.

Directory.csv

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

Note: A maximum of 20 characters ("0-9", "A-Z"*", "#", ".", "-" or "_") can be entered aname.

Note: To delete an entered character, press key.

Note: Be sure not to turn OFF the DT700 Serie"Saving..." is displayed on the LCD.

Note: When the downloading process ends in"Downloading Failed!" is displayed on thCheck to see the following and then retry.

Exit

Download Complete!

Page 91: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

DowplacdirecA difspecDT7TFTIncoFTPbeentelepThe TFTequiLANdisc

83

Check Points Actions

nload file is not ed in the specified tory.

Place the download file in the specified directory.

ferent file name is ified between 00 Series and FTP/P server.

Set the same file name from both DT700 Series and FTP/TFTP server.

rrect IP address of /TFTP server has entered from the hone.

Set the proper IP address of FTP/TFTP server.

power to FTP/P server or network pment is OFF.

Turn on the power.

cable is onnected.

Reconnect the cable securely.

Page 92: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

DT73settinthe sto th

BefoTFTP

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

tination

ons.ss

r OK soft

Not

D

.0.0.0,

84

O BACKUP PERSONAL SETTINGS

0\DT710 Series user can backup personalgs of DT Series to FTP/TFTP server. To back upetting data, the DT Series needs to be connectede network that has FTP (TFTP server).

re starting the backup, an IP Address of the FTP/ Server must be entered from DT Series.

P 1: Set up the FTP/TFTP server.

<FTP server>Confirm the designated directory (for Win-dows IIS, the default is “C:\InetPub\ftproot) for the backed up file.

<TFTP server>Specify a desired destination directory for the backed up file.

P 2: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 3: Select Data Backup/Restore.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Protocol.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select a protocol used by the desserver.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

e: For details on the FTP/TFTP service, contact theSystem Administrator.

T730/DT710

3

3

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

12

[Setting]

3

OKMenu

User SettingDownload

Data Backup/Restore

4

4

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data BackupData Restore

Server Address

5 FTP SettingsProtocol

1 2

Page 93: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

s, then

ettings

ons.ss ,

e HOW Basic

85

P 6: The display goes back to the Backup/Re-store screen.

When FTP is selected here, go to the next Step (STEP 7).

When TFTP is selected here, go to the next STEP 15.

P 7: Select FTP Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 8: Select User ID.

Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 9: Enter a User ID by using digit keypress or OK soft key.

STEP 10:The display goes back to the FTP Sscreen. Select Password.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

12

[Protocol]

OKBack

TFTP

FTP

1

2

5

5

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack

Data BackupData Restore

Server Address

5ProtocolFTP Settings

1

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

1

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

PasswordFolder

User ID

[User ID]

OKBackBK

AInput a user ID.

2

2

Page 94: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

e FTP/K soft

ettings display

Note HOW Basic

86

P 11:Enter a password by using digit keys, thenpress or OK soft key.

P 12:The display goes back to the FTP Settingsscreen. Select Folder.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 13:Enter the destination directory of thTFTP server and then press or Okey.

STEP 14:The display goes back to the FTP Sscreen. Press or Back soft key tothe Backup/Restore screen.

e: For details on character entry method, see HOWTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4 BasicOperation.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

OKBackBK

A[Password]Input a password.

3

3

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack

User IDPassword

Folder

OKBackBK

A[Folder]Input a folder name.

Page 95: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

or

up/Re-.ons.ss ,

as fol-

87

P 15:Select Server Address.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 16:Enter an IP address of the destination FTP/TFTP server. For example, to set the IP ad-dress of 10.41.208.205, enter 10*41*208*205[separate with an asterisk (*)].

After entering an IP address, press OK soft key.

STEP 17:The display goes back to the Backstore screen. Select Data BackupSelect an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 18:The default file name will be displayedlows:

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

3

3

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data BackupData Restore

5 FTP SettingsProtocolServer Address

[Server Address]

OKBackBK

1‘*‘For‘.‘

. . .

1

1

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data Restore

5 FTP SettingsProtocolServer Address

Data Backup

Page 96: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

/Not

Not

Not

Not

Not

Not

"Upload to see

e ies r.

ress

88

P 19:Press or Exec soft key to start the databackup. While making a backup copy, theLCD displays “Uploading...” first and then“Saving...”.

P 20:After the data backup is complete, the displaychanges as follows:

The display goes back to the BackupRestore screen by Exit soft key.e: Do not change the extension of the backup file.

The setting data of the telephone can only bebacked up as a.tgz file.

e: When changing the default file name, press BKsoft key once to delete the default file name andthen enter a new file name by using the digitskeys.

e: For details on character entry method, see HOWTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4 BasicOperation.

e: A maximum of 20 characters ("0-9", "A-Z", "a-z","*", "#", ".", "-" or "_") can be entered as a filename.

e: To delete an entered character, press BK softkey.

e: Be sure not to turn OFF the DT700 Series while"Saving..." is displayed on the LCD.

ExecCancelBK

A[Data Backup]Input a folder name.

PersonalData.tgz

Note: When the data backup ends in failure, Failed!" is displayed on the LCD. Checkthe following and then make a retry.

Check Points Actions

A different file name is specified between DT700 Series and FTP/TFTP server.

Set the same file namfrom both DT700 Serand FTP/TFTP serve

Incorrect IP address of FTP/TFTP server has been entered from the telephone.

Set the proper IP addof FTP/TFTP server.

The power to FTP/TFTP server or network equipment is OFF.

Turn on the power.

LAN cable is disconnected.

Reconnect the cable securely.

Exit

Upload Complete!

Page 97: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

DT73settinthe tthe n

BefoFTP/

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

r which

ons.ss

r OK soft

Not

D

.0.0.0,

89

O RESTORE PERSONAL SETTINGS

0/DT710 Series user can restore the personalgs of DT Series. To download the backup file to

elephone, the DT Series needs to be connected toetwork that has FTP (TFTP server).

re starting the download, an IP Address of theTFTP Server must be entered from DT Series.

P 1: Set up the FTP/TFTP server.

<FTP server>Put the backup file you want to restore into the designated directory (for Windows IIS, the default is “C:\InetPub\ftproot) of the FTP server.

<TFTP server>Put the backup file you want to restore into a desired directory of TFTP server and then specify it as the directory for downloading.

P 2: Display the Menu screen, and select Setting.

P 3: Select Data Backup/Restore.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.

• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Protocol.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select a protocol used by the servestores the backup file.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

e: For details on the FTP/TFTP service, contact theSystem Administrator.

T730/DT710

3

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

3

12

[Setting]

3OKMenu

User SettingDownload

Data Backup/Restore

4

4

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data BackupData Restore

Server Address

5 FTP SettingsProtocol

1 2

Page 98: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

s, then

ettings

ons.ss ,

e HOW Basic

90

P 6: The display goes back to the Backup/Re-store screen.

When FTP is selected here, go to the next Step (STEP 7).

When TFTP is selected here, go to the next STEP 15.

P 7: Select FTP Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 8: Select User ID.

Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 9: Enter a User ID by using digit keypress or OK soft key.

STEP 10:The display goes back to the FTP Sscreen. Select Password.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

12

[Protocol]

OKBack

TFTP

FTP

1

2

5

5

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack

Data BackupData Restore

Server Address

5ProtocolFTP Settings

1

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

1

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

PasswordFolder

User ID

[User ID]

OKBackBK

AInput a user ID.

2

2

Page 99: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

p file is key.

ettings display

Not e HOW Basic

91

P 11:Enter a password by using digit keys, thenpress or OK soft key.

P 12:The display goes back to the FTP Settingsscreen. Select Folder.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 13:Enter the directory where the backustored and then press or OK soft

STEP 14:The display goes back to the FTP Sscreen. Press or Back soft key tothe Backup/Restore screen.

e: For details on character entry method, see HOWTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4 BasicOperation.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

OKBackBK

A[Password]Input a password.

3

3

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack

User IDPassword

Folder

OKBackBK

A[Folder]Input a folder name.

12

[FTP Settings]

3OKBack↓

Folder

User IDPassword

Page 100: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

as fol-

backupnnot be

ess BKme ande digits

e HOW Basic

92

P 15:Select Server Address.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 16:Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP serverwhich stores the backup file. For example, toset the IP address of 10.41.208.205, enter10*41*208*205 [separate with an asterisk(*)].

After entering an IP address, press or OK soft key.

P 17:The display goes back to the Backup/Re-store screen. Select Data Restore.

Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 18:The default file name will be displayedlows:

3

3

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data BackupData Restore

5 FTP SettingsProtocolServer Address

[Server Address]

OKBackBK

1‘*‘For‘.‘

. . .

2

Note: Do not change the extension (.tgz) of thefile. If the extension is changed, the file carestored properly.

Note: When changing the default file name, prsoft key once to delete the default file nathen enter a new file name by using thkeys.

Note: For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4Operation.

2

12

[Backup/Restore]

34

OKBack↓

Data Backup

5 FTP SettingsProtocolServer AddressData Restore

ExecCancelBK

A[Data Restore]Input a folder name.

PersonalData.tgz

Page 101: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

Not

Not

Not

file in y.

e ries r.

dress

93

P 19:Press or Exec soft key to start restoringthe backup data to the telephone. Whiledownloading the backup data, the LCD dis-plays “Downloading...” first and then “Sav-ing...”.

P 20:After the downloading process is complete,the display changes as follows:

The display goes back to the Backup/Restore screen by Exit soft key.

e: A maximum of 20 characters ("0-9", "A-Z", "a-z","*", "#", ".", "-" or "_") can be entered as a filename.

e: To delete an entered character, press BK softkey.

e: Be sure not to turn OFF the DT700 Series while"Saving..." is displayed on the LCD.

e: When the downloading process ends in failure,"Download Failed!" is displayed on the LCD.Check to see the following and then make a retry.

Exit

Download Complete!

Check Points ActionsDownload file is not placed in the specified directory.

Place the download the specified director

A different file name is specified between DT700 Series and FTP/TFTP server.

Set the same file namfrom both DT700 Seand FTP/TFTP serve

Incorrect IP address of FTP/TFTP server has been entered from the telephone.

Set the proper IP adof FTP/TFTP server.

The power to FTP/TFTP server or network equipment is OFF.

Turn on the power.

LAN cable is disconnected.

Reconnect the cablesecurely.

Page 102: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

SETDT3

• T

The of rin

STE

STE

0 - 12).ng y.

D

94

UP WITH MENU KEY FOR 00 SERIES

O CHANGE RINGER TONE VOLUME

procedure below shows how to change the volumeger tone.

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.Then, select Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 2: Select Ring Volume.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Ring Volume can be set in 13 levels (Adjust the ringer tone volume by usikey and then press or OK soft ke

T330

Menu

3

3

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

DirectoryCall History

Settings

1

1

Turn the volume up.

Turn the volume down.

12

[Settings]

3

OKBack

Off Hook RingBack Light

45

HeadsetPeripherals

Ring Volume

[ ]

[Ring Volume]

OKBack

Page 103: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TR

The

STE

STE

, select

ons.ss

r OK soft

95

O ENABLE/DISABLE OFF-HOOK INGING

procedure below shows how to

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.Then, select Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 2: Select Off Hook Ring.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: To disable/enable the off-hook ringingDisable or Enable.

Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

DT330

Menu

3

3

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

DirectoryCall History

Settings

2

2

12

[Settings]

3

OKBack

Back Light45

HeadsetPeripherals

Ring VolumeOff Hook Ring

Note: Default setting is 2 Enable.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

1 2

Back OK

[Offhook Ring]

Disable12 Enable

Page 104: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The back

The seco

STE

STE

t.ons.ss

r OK soft

or OK

D

are

are

96

O ENABLE/DISABLE BACKLIGHT

following explains how to enable/disable thelights of LCD and digit keys.

backlights illuminate (for approximately 10nds) when you press any key or lift the handset.

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.Then, select Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 2: Select Back Light.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Make a selection from the following lisSelect an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

STEP 4: After Making a selection, press soft key.

T330

Menu

3

3

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

DirectoryCall History

Settings

3

3

Menu Item Meaning

1 DisableBacklights of LCD and digit keysdisabled.

2 EnableBacklights of LCD and digit keysenabled.

Note: Default setting is 2 Enable.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

12

[Settings]

3

OKBack

45

HeadsetPeripherals

Ring VolumeOff Hook RingBack Light

1 2

Back OK

[Back Light]

12 Enable

Disable

Page 105: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

The ringin

STE

STE

set, se-

ons.ss

r OK soft

97

O SET RINGING OF HEADSET

procedure below shows how to enable/disable theg of headset.

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.Then, select Settings.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 2: Select Headset.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: To disable/enable the ringing of headlect Disable or Enable.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

DT330

Menu

3

3

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

DirectoryCall History

Settings

4

4

12

[Settings]

3

OKBack

45 Peripherals

Ring VolumeOff Hook RingBack LightHeadset

Note: Default setting is 1 Disable.

Note: The enabled item is highlighted.

1 2

1 2

Back OK

[Headset]

12 Enable

Disable

Page 106: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

98

This page is for your notes.

Page 107: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

4This DT S

•••••••••••••••

99

. BASIC OPERATION

chapter describes the following basic operation oferies.

TO LOGINTO LOGOUTTO MAKE AN EXTERNAL CALLTO MAKE AN INTERNAL CALLTO ANSWER AN EXTERNAL CALLTO ANSWER AN INTERNAL CALLMULTILINE APPEARANCETO HOLD A CALLTO PLACE A CALL ON EXCLUSIVE HOLDTO TRANSFER A CALLHOW TO INPUT CHARACTERSSECURITY MODEEMERGENCY CALLXML APPLICATIONSCREEN POP-UP

Page 108: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE(Stat

STE

STE

re Key

of the

termi-

Not

eries.

at the).

100

LOGIN

P 1: When login mode is activated, the telephoneprompts for Login ID and Password.

P 2: Enter login code and press Set soft key.ion number is used as the Login code.)

P 3: Enter the password and press OK Soft key.

P 4: If the login code is accepted, display changesto normal idle status.

TO LOGOUT

STEP 1: Press the preassigned Logout Featuon the terminal.

STEP 2: “LOGOUT?” is displayed on the LCDterminal.

STEP 3: Press the Logout Feature Key on thenal again.

e: This feature is only available for DT700 Series.

DT730/710

Cancel Back Set OKPasswordLogin ID :

:-

Cancel Back Set OKPasswordLogin ID :

:2000

Cancel Back Set OKPasswordLogin ID :

:2000*****

MIC DND >>>7:25 AM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: This feature is only available for DT700 S

Note: The soft key location is an example.

Note: Logout key is assigned by data settingECP (Enterprise Communication Platform

DT730/710

MIC DND >>>7:25 AM MON 12 JUL 2010

7:25 AM MON 12 JUL 2010L-OUT >>>

LOGOUT?

Page 109: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

Whesonawill bare hversamay matio

STE

STE

ation.

ectory

Not

Not

DT7

digits ofd. If thehe firstt sevenor moredminis-

er

de

101

MAKE AN EXTERNAL CALL

n dialed telephone number is registered in Per-l Directory, the corresponding name informatione displayed on LCD of DT730 Series while youearing a ringback tone or are engaged in a con-tion. According to the initial settings, the display

differ from the following examples. For more infor-n, contact the system administrator.

P 1: Lift handset or press key, receive dialtone.

P 2: Dial the Central Office access code, e.g. 9.

STEP 3: Dial desired telephone number.

(while hearing a ringback tone)

STEP 4: Use handset or MIC to start a conversDisplay indicates:(while in a conversation)

• When dialed number is registered in Personal Dir

e: Personal Directory Name Display function isavailable only for DT730 Series.

e: This section describes the Normal Dial Mode.Regarding the other mode, see TO ORIGINATE ACALL USING SELECTIVE DIALING (DYNAMICDIAL PAD, PRESET DIAL) in Chapter 5.

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010MIC DND >>>

31313

Station Number of My Line

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010MIC DND >>>

9

Dialed Code

Note: In the above case, a maximum of eight the number (including “*”) can be displayedialed number exceeds eight digits, “tseven digits of the number + *” or “the lasdigits of the number + *” are displayed. Finformation, please contact the system atrator.

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 20109XXXXXXXXX

MIC >>>

Dialed Code + Numb

9XXXXXX*00:05

Elapsed Time

TOM JONESMIC DND >>>

Dialed CoName Informationregistered in Personal Directory + Number

Page 110: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• Wto

Not

102

hen dialed number is not registered in Personal Direc-ry

e: My Line is an actual line that is directly associ-ated with station number of the telephone. Youcan make/answer a call via this line. Usually, Myline is seized automatically only by lifting thehandset or pressing the Speaker key.

00:05

Elapsed Time

MIC DND >>>

Dialed Code

9XXXXXXXXX

+ Number

Page 111: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

WheDirecdispling aAccofromconta

STE

STE

(w• W

re

ersonal

nversa-

onal Di-

Not

Not

DT7 mber

r

ber

103

MAKE AN INTERNAL CALL

n dialed station number is registered in Personaltory, the corresponding name information will beayed on LCD of DT730 Series while you are hear- ringback tone or are engaged in a conversation.rding to the initial settings, the display may differ the following examples. For more information,ct the system administrator.

P 1: Lift handset or press key, receive dialtone.

P 2: Dial desired station number. Display indi-cates digits dialed.

hile hearing a ringback tone)hen dialed station number is registered in Personal Di-ctory

• When dialed station number is not registered in PDirectory

STEP 3: Use the handset or MIC to start a cotion.

(while in a conversation)

• When dialed station number is registered in Persrectory

e: Personal Directory Name Display function isavailable only for DT730 Series.

e: This section describes the Normal Dial Mode.About the other mode, see TO ORIGINATE ACALL USING SELECTIVE DIALING (DYNAMICDIAL PAD, PRESET DIAL) in chapter 5.

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 201031313

Station Number of My Line

Blink

MIC DND >>>

31314

Dialed Station Nu

MIC >>>MARY HARRIS

Name Information registeredin Personal Directory

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 201031314

Dialed Station Numbe

MIC >>>

31314

Dialed Station Num

Name Informationregistered in Personal Directory

MIC DND >>>MARY HARRIS

Page 112: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• WD

Not

104

hen dialed station number is not registered in Personalirectory

e: My Line is an actual line that is directly associ-ated with station number of the telephone. Youcan make/answer a call via this line. Usually, Myline is seized automatically only by lifting thehandset or pressing the Speaker key.

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 201031314

Dialed Station Number

MIC DND >>>

Page 113: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

WhePerstion you convplay infor

STE

• Wso

• WP

• W

ropriate

d in Per-

tered in

Not

DT7 er

ber

105

ANSWER AN EXTERNAL CALL

n calling party telephone number is registered inonal Directory, the corresponding name informa-will be displayed on LCD of DT730 Series whileare hearing a ringing tone or are engaged in aersation. According to the initial settings, the dis-may differ from the above example. For more

mation, contact the system administrator.

P 1: You hear the ringing tone. Call indicator flash-es red while hearing ring tone.

hen calling party telephone number is registered in Per-nal Directory

hen calling party telephone number is not registered inersonal Directory

hen caller ID is not received

STEP 2: Press key or touch the appLine Key.

STEP 3: Lift the handset to answer the call.

(while in a conversation)• When calling party telephone number is registere

sonal Directory

• When calling party telephone number is not regisPersonal Directory

e: Personal Directory Name Display function isavailable only for DT730 Series.

30/710 DT330/310

TOM JONES

Name Information registeredin Personal Directory

MIC DND >>>

01234567MIC DND >>>

Calling Party Telephone Number

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010DDD 3

Trunk TrunkNumbType

MIC DND >>>

Answer

TOM JONES

Name Information

Personal Directory

MIC DND >>>

registered in

00:05

ElapsedTime

Calling Party

MIC DND >>>

Telephone Num

00:05

ElapsedTime

01234567

Page 114: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• W

Not

106

hen caller ID is not received

e: When an incoming call is terminated to My Lineof the telephone, you can usually answer the callonly by lifting the handset or pressing theSpeaker Key.

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010DDD 3

Trunk Trunk NumberType

MIC DND >>>

00:05

ElapsedTime

Page 115: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOThe inter

WheDirecdispling aAccofromtact t

STE

• Wre

• WD

ropriate

onal Di-

ersonal

Not

y Line the calling the

tation

tion

107

ANSWER AN INTERNAL CALL following procedure explains how to answer annal call routed to My Line of the telephone.

n calling station number is registered in Personaltory, the corresponding name information will beayed on LCD of DT730 Series while you are hear- ringing tone or are engaged in a conversation.rding to the initial settings, the display may differ the above example. For more information, con-he system administrator.

P 1: You hear the ringing tone. Call indicator flash-es red while hearing ring tone.

hen calling station number is registered in Personal Di-ctory

hen calling station number is not registered in Personalirectory

STEP 2: Press key or touch the appLine Key.

STEP 3: Lift the handset to answer the call.

(while in a conversation)• When calling station number is registered in Pers

rectory

• When calling station number is not registered in PDirectory

e: Personal Directory Name Display function isavailable only for DT730 Series.

Name Information registeredin Personal Directory

MIC >>>MARY HARRIS

31314

Calling Station Number

Calling Station Number

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 201031314

MIC >>>

Note: When an incoming call is terminated to Mof the telephone, you can usually answeronly by lifting the handset or pressSpeaker Key.

Answer

Name Information

Personal Directory registered in

31314

Calling SNumber

MIC >>>MARY HARRIS

Calling StaNumber

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 201031314

MIC >>>

Page 116: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

MU

To OSTE

STE

STE

To A

STE

STE

STE

hes.

rse.

Recall

nd ringcall on

on yourws as aflashing LED on

DT7

tations,

retrieve

0/310

108

LTILINE APPEARANCE

riginate a CallP 1: Press the MULTILINE APPEARANCE fea-

ture key.

P 2: Lift handset or press key. Dial theCentral Office access code (i.e.9 (US), 0(Aust)).

P 3: Dial the desired number.

nswer a Call

P 1: Press the MULTILINE APPEARANCE fea-ture key (ringing and flashing LED alert userto incoming call).

P 2: Lift handset or press key.

P 3: Speak with incoming party.

TO HOLD A CALL

STEP 1: Press key. Held line wink flas

To RetrieveSTEP 1: Lift handset or press key.

STEP 2: Press held line. Use handset to conve

If unanswered

STEP 1: After preprogrammed time, Automaticis initiated.

STEP 2: Visual and audible signal (rapid flash aburst) is sent to station that placed hold.

Note: Hold shows as a flashing green LED phone. The same line on other phones shoflashing red LED. Recall shows as a green LED on your phone and flashing redother phones with the same line.

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Speaker

Note: If held line appears on other DT Series sthe associated LED flashes red slowly.

Note: Any station with this line appearance can the call.

DT730/710 DT33

HOLD

MIC >>>

Held Station Number

2001HOLD1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Page 117: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOHO

STE

To RSTE

STE

If unSTE

STE

ted dial

ang up

Not

Not

e from showse. Theolid red

r

109

PLACE A CALL ON EXCLUSIVE LD

P 1: Press key twice. Line appearance in-dicates interrupted wink.

etrieveP 1: Lift handset or press key.

P 2: Press held line. Use handset to converse.

answeredP 1: After preprogrammed time, Automatic Recall

is initiated.

P 2: Visual and audible signal (rapid flash and ringburst) is sent to station which placed call onExclusive Hold. Recall shows as a flashinggreen LED on your phone, and solid red onother phones with same line.

TO TRANSFER A CALL

STEP 1: After conversing, ask party to hold.

STEP 2: Press key. Receive interruptone.

STEP 3: Dial destination station’s extension, hor wait for answer.

e: If held line appears on other DT Series stations,LED remains steadily lit red.

e: Only the DT Series that set Exclusive Hold optioncan retrieve the call.

DT730/710 DT330/310

HOLD

MIC >>>

Held Station Number

2001E_HOLD1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Note: Exclusive Hold excludes any other phonpicking up your held call. Exclusive Holdas a flashing green LED on your phonsame line on other phones appears as a sLED.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Transfer

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

TRANSFER

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

TRANSFER 2001

or trunk numbeTransferred station

Page 118: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

110

P 4: If transferring party hangs up, that station’snumber appears in the center of recipient’sdisplay.

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

TRANSFER 2000 DDD 3

Transferring station

Page 119: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

HOThis

• CW habeticc ged byp

T

K

111

W TO INPUT CHARACTERS section explains how to enter characters on the text input screen such as Name or User ID, etc.

haracter Entry Modehen entering characters from the telephone set, the following three modes are available: uppercase alp

haracter, lowercase alphabetic character and numeric character. The character entry mode can be chanressing key (alphabetic/numeric) or from the Sub Menu screen (uppercase/lowercase).

he enabled entry mode is indicated in the top portion of the LCD screen (DT730 only).

DT730

*

Uppercase Alphabetic Lowercase Alphabetic

Numeric Character Mode

By pressing “*” key

Indicates the enabled character mode. (DT730 only.)

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

AAInput a name.[Name]

OBackOptionBK

Aa

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A1

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

ReturnOverwrite/Insert

910

Word-case

Character ModeCharacter ModeSelect “2 Word-case” to switchbetween uppercase and lowercase.

or from Sub Menu (select “1 Change-word”)

Page 120: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

T played.A

112

o display the Sub Menu screen, press HELP key or Option Soft Key while the text input screen is dislso, the following operations are available from the Sub Menu screen.

Note: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

Sub Menu Items Descriptions

Change-word Change character entry mode between uppercase alphabetic, lower-case alphabetic and numeric character.

Word-case Switch between uppercase and lowercase.Word-width Not used.Delete Delete a single character.Copy Copy the specified characters.Cut Cut the specified characters.Paste Paste the specified characters.Space Enter a space.Return Start a new line.Overwrite/Insert Write over existing characters.

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

ReturnOverwrite/Insert

910

Word-case

Page 121: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• C

<

113

haracter Code List

Character Code For English (1/2)>

DIGIT KEY

CASE SHIFT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th

. , \ 1 ? ! “Note

@ : ;

A B C 2

a b c 2

D E F 3

d e f 3

G H I 4

g h i 4

J K L 5

j k l 5

M N O 6

m n o 6

P Q R S 7

p q r s 7

T U V 8

t u v 8

W X Y Z 9

w x y z 9

[SP] 0

Note: Not available from Firmware version 3.0.0.0 and later

1 A

a

2 Aa

3A

a

4A

a

5A

a

6 A

a

7 A

a

8 Aa

9Aa

0 Aa

Page 122: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

<C

114

haracter Code For English (2/2)>

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th

Note1

* # . / : ~ ! @ $ %

11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th 20th

^ & ( ) ' ? “Note2

_ + -

21th 22th 23th 24th 25th 26th 27th 28th 29th 30th

= [ ] { } < > , ; \

Note1

Used as a case shift key. Shifts the characters between alphabetic and numeric.

Note1: and key is the same for Russian, Turkish and other Languages.

Note2: Not available from Firmware version 3.0.0.0 and later

#

A

a

A

a

A

a

*

# *

Page 123: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

<

DK 5th

¡

N

115

Character Code For Russian>

IGIT EY

CASE SHIFT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 1

. , : ! ? + - % & / ( ) = ¿

A Б В Г

а б в г

Д Е Ё Ж З

д е ё ж з

И Й К Л

и й к л

М Н О П

м н о п

Р С Т У

р с т у

Ф Х Ц Ч

ф х ц ч

Ш Щ Ъ Ы Ь

ш щ ъ ы ь

Э Ю Я

э ю я

[SP]

ote: and key is the same for English. Refer to the <Character Code For English (2/2)>.

1A

a

2 Aa

3A

a

4A

a

5 A

a

6A

a

7A

a

8 Aa

9Aa

0 Aa

# *

Page 124: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

<

DK 5th

¡

N

116

Character Code For Turkish>

IGIT EY

CASE SHIFT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 1

. , : ! ? + - % & / ( ) = ¿

A B C Ça b c çD E Fd e f

G H I

g h I

J K Lj k l

M N O Öm n o öP R Sp r sT U Ü Vt u ü vY Zy z

[SP]

ote: and key is the same for English. Refer to the <Character Code For English (2/2)>.

1A

a

2 Aa

3 A

a

4A Ğ İ

a ğ i

5 A

a

6A

a

7A Ş

a Ş

8 Aa

9 Aa

0 Aa

# *

Page 125: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

<

DK 5th

¡

N

117

Character Code For Other Languages>

IGIT EY

CASE SHIFT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 1

. , : ! ? + - % & / ( ) = ¿

A B C À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ça b c à á â ã ä å æ çD E F È É Ê Ëd e f è é ê ëG H I Ì Í Î Ïg h i ì í î ïJ K Lj k l

M N O Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö Œ Øm n o ñ ò ó ô õ ö œ øP Q R S ßp q r s ßT U V Ù Ú Û Üt u v ù ú û üW X Y Zw x y z

[SP]

ote: and key is the same for English. Refer to the <Character Code For English (2/2)>.

1A

a

2 Aa

3A

a

4 A

a

5A

a

6A

a

7A

a

8 Aa

9 Aa

0 Aa

# *

Page 126: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

<

DK 5th

\

N

118

Number Code>

IGIT EY

CASE SHIFT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

* # . @ / ( ) , - _ : ‘ ~ &

Used as a case shift key. Shifts the characters between alphabetic and numeric.

ote: When entering password, “0-9”, “*” and “#” are available.“#” is entered by pressing key.

“*” is entered by pressing key.

1 1

2 1

3 1

4 1

5 1

6 1

7 1

8 1

9 1

0 1

# 1

* 1

#

*

Page 127: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• CAl

STE

STE

enu to

the firm-

119

haracter Entry Methods an example of character entry method, the fol-

owing shows how to enter “Ken Kobus”.

P 1: Press key twice to enter “K”.

P 2: Press HELP key or Option soft key to displaySub Menu screen, and then select Word-case to switch the text input mode from up-percase to lowercase.

STEP 3: Press or OK soft key on the Sub Mgo back to text input screen.

STEP 4: Enter “en” by using digit keys.Press key twice to enter “e”.Press key twice to enter “n“.

STEP 5: Press key once to enter a space.

5

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

K

2

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

ReturnOverwrite/Insert

910

Word-case

Note: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for ware version before 5.0.0.0.

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

a

K

36

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

a

Ken

0

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

a

Ken

Page 128: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

120

P 6: Press HELP key or Option soft key to displaySubMenu screen, and then select Word-case to switch the text input mode from low-ercase to uppercase.

P 7: Press or OK soft key on the Sub Menu togo back to text input screen.

STEP 8: Press key twice to enter “K”.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

2

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

ReturnOverwrite/Insert

910

Word-case

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Ken

5

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Ken K

Page 129: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

121

P 9: Press HELP key or Option soft key to displaySubMenu screen, and then select Word-case to switch the text input mode from low-ercase to uppercase.

P 10:Press or OK soft key on the Sub Menu togo back to text input screen.

STEP 11:Enter “obus” by using digit keys.Press key three times to enter “o”.Press key twice to enter “b“.Press key twice to enter “u”.Press key four times to enter “s“.

STEP 12:Press or OK soft key.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

2

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

ReturnOverwrite/Insert

910

Word-case

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

a

Ken K

6287

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

a

Ken Kobus

Page 130: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

STE

STE

STE

Not

122

o Overwrite Characters

P 1: Place the cursor at the left of the charactersto be overwritten.

P 2: Press HELP key or Option soft key.

P 3: On the following Sub Menu screen, selectOverwrite/Insert and then press , or OK soft key.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

ABCDE

10

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

DeleteCopy

Return910

Word-case

Overwrite/Insert

Page 131: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

opy areey.

or OKted, or

he firm-

123

P 4: Enter new words over existing characters. Inthis example, “F” is entered.

• To Copy and Paste Characters

STEP 1: While characters which you want to cdisplayed, HELP key or Option soft k

STEP 2: On the SubMenu screen, press soft key while Copy is highlighpress key.

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

ABFDE

Note: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for tware version before 5.0.0.0.

Input a name.[Name]

BackBK

A

ABCDEOption OK

55

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678

PasteSpace

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

Delete

Return910

Word-case

Overwrite/Insert

Copy

Page 132: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

Pastekey. (or

rted as

he firm-

124

P 3: Place the cursor at the starting point of thetarget characters by using and thenpress Start soft key.

P 4: Place the cursor at the end point of the targetcharacters and then press End soft key.

P 5: Place the cursor at position where you wantto paste the copied characters and then pressHELP key or Option soft key.

STEP 6: On the Sub Menu screen, select and then press , or OK soft press key.)

STEP 7: The copied characters “CD” are insefollows:

Input a name.[Copy]

BackStart

A

ABCDE

Input a name.[Copy]

BackEnd

A

ABCDE

Input a name.[Name]

BackBK

A

ABCDEOption OK

Note: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for tware version before 5.0.0.0.

7

7

12

Word-width

SubMenu

345678 Space

Change-word

OKCancel

Cut

Delete

Return910

↓Word-case

Overwrite/Insert

Copy

Paste

Input a name.[Name]

BackBK

A

CDABCDEOption OK

Page 133: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

SECDT73inforlocke

ou cansetting,erminal

s. TheD.

00 Se-

Not

Not

ailable mode.ecurity called party.

any the the

125

URITY MODE 0 Series has the Security key which prevents

mation leakage from terminal. While the terminal isd, Security Lamp lights up.

• TO LOCK THE TELEPHONE

Before placing DT700 Series in Security mode, yset a password. For details on the password see TO CHANGE PASSWORD in chapter 3 TSetup.

STEP 1: Press Security key on DT730 Seriefollowing message is displayed on LC

STEP 2: Press or OK soft key to place DT7ries in Security mode.

e: When the system administrator invalidates the security mode, this function cannot be used. For details of the security mode, con-tact the system administrator.

e: While the telephone is locked, keybecomes disabled. Also, any features pro-vided by the telephony server, such as callorigination or call answering, cannot be per-formed.(The Incoming call cannot be pickedup though "Ringing" or "Voice call" are pos-sible.)It is necessary to release the securitymode to respond.

DT730

Security Lamp lights up.

Security lock will be released.Please input a password.

Press Security Key.

BK Cancel OK

Menu

Note: To make a call of VOICE CALL is avtoward a called party in the SecurityWhen a called party activates the Smode with leaving its MIC to ON, theparty can converse with a callingthough terminal operation is restricted

Note: Even when the telephone is reset for reason (such as power-off, etc.) whiletelephone is placed in security mode,lock is not released.

Security Lock?

OKCancel

Page 134: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

• T

STE

STE

the fol-t case,

sswordessage

he tele- will be, make

126

P 3: When DT730 Series is placed in Securitymode, Security Lamp lights red and thescreen saver will be activated.

O UNLOCK THE TELEPHONE

P 1: Display the Password Entry screen by eitherof the following operations.

Press any key while the screen saver isactivated.Press Security key while the screen saver isactivated.

P 2: Enter the password and then press orOK soft key. Security Lamp is extinguishedand Security Mode is canceled.

Security Lock

Security lock will be released.

OKCancel

Please input a password.

BK

Note: When the password entry ends in failure,lowing error message is issued. In tha

press or OK soft key and then retry.

Note: After a third attempt (if incorrect paentered three times), the following error m

is issued. Press or OK soft key. Tphone locks up, and any key operationdisabled for 10 minutes. After 10 minutesa retry.

Password Error.

OKCancel

Retry?

Incorrect security code

OK

password entered.

Page 135: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

EMYou telepSecutelep

STE

STE

andset.ecurity

Not

Not

Not

Not

rminedhan thedialed,

ew sec-rgency

0.0.0 orginatinget after

127

ERGENCY CALL can make a call to a predetermined emergencyhone number while the telephone is locked (inrity mode). This function is available on thehone with Security key.

P 1: Lift the handset while the telephone is locked(the screen saver is activated).

P 2: Dial an emergency telephone number bypressing digit keys(0-9, *, #).

STEP 3: After a conversation, replace the hThe LCD turns to time display. (Smode is released.)

e: You can make an emergency call to only the pre-determined number. For details on the setting ofthe emergency number, contact the systemadministrator.

e: Emergency call cannot be made with Speakerkey.

e: When pressing Unlock soft key, the telephoneprompts for the Security mode cancellation pass-word.

e: Emergency telephone number needs to be set inadvance. For the setting of the emergency tele-phone numbers, contact the system administra-tor.

DT730

Dial Emergency Number Only

Unlock

Note: You can make a call to only the predetenumber. When telephone numbers other tpredetermined emergency number are the following message appears (after a fonds, the display goes back to "Dial EmeNumber Only” screen).

Note: For the terminal with firmware version 5.later, if Security Lock is not set after orian Emergency Call, Security Lock will be s60 minutes from releasing Security Mode.

Invalid Dial.911

Page 136: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

XMDT73the exterservi

Also4 apscreedisplcall wsusp

The fromrelat

• TWhewhicauto

• TFromXMLSTE

yed on

ant to

, presse XMLrunning screen

Not

128

L APPLICATION 0 has an XML browser function. You can display

information of XML application installed in annal server onto the LCD of DT730 and use variousces in collaboration with the XML application.

, It is possible to launch multiple applications (up toplications) simultaneously, and you can switch then quickly. If you receive an incoming call while

aying an application screen, you can answer theithout exiting the application. You can restart the

ended application by pressing an icon of itself.

following explains how to start the XML application DT730. For more information, refer to manualsing to XML applications.

o start up XML applicationn you start up the phone, the application screen,h is registered as home URL, is displayedmatically.

o switch XML applications the menu screen displays XML application icons,

applications can be switched.P 1: Press key to display the menu

screen.

The icons of running XML applications are displathe menu screen.

STEP 2: Select an application icon you wdisplay on the menu screen.

• To exit XML applicationsWhile an XML application screen is displayedExit key to exit the application. After thapplication is exited, the icons of the applications are aligned to the top of the Menufrom the above.

e: Multiple applications are supported since firm-ware version 5.0.0.0. For details, please contact the system administrator.

DT730

Menu

History

Directory

Setting

Portal

Service

XML-1

XML-2

XML-3

History

Directly

Setting

Portal

Service

XML-1

XML-3

Page 137: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• WYou Portanotificurre

Whilexec

Wheappeapplian aicon.

unch a

Not

129

hen a fifth application is launchedcan launch up to four XML applications includingl at a time. If you try to launch a fifth application, acation message to ask you to exit one of thently running applications is displayed.

e this error message is displayed, you cannotute any operations on XML applications.

n you press Next key, the application exit screenars. On the exit screen, the currently running XMLcation icons excluding Portal are displayed. Selectpplication icon you want to exit and then press

The selected application exits. Now, you can lanew application.

e: If you do not operate anything for 10 secondsafter an error message is displayed, the trial oflaunching the new application is automaticallycanceled.

4 windows already set!You need to close 1 window.

NextCancel

Please close 1 window.

XML-2

XML-3

XML-1Can you choose among below?

History

Directory

Setting

Portal

Service

XML-1

XML-2

XML-3

Page 138: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

SCWhescreedisplthe in

• TSTE

STE

STE

s.

Not

130

REEN POP-UP n you receive an incoming call while an applicationn (History, Directory, or XML application) is

ayed, you can suspend the application and answercoming call.

o set the screen pop-up functionP 1: Press key to display the menu

screen. Then, select Setting.

P 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and press ,

or OK.• Press .

P 3: Select Usability.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and press ,

or OK.• Press .

STEP 4: Select Help Key Mode.Select an item by one of the following operation• Press , or OK.

• Press .

e: This function is available since firmware version 5.0.0.0.

DT730

Menu

1

1

12

Data Backup/Restore

[Setting]

3Download

OKBack↓

User Setting

7

7

12

[User Setting]

34567

Change Password

Peripherals

OKBack↓

Security

Incoming CallTalk

Display

Usability

1

1

1

[Usability]

OKBack

Help Key Mode

Page 139: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

• TThe displcall w

Whe

STE

onfirmet Help

key tot key 1.Pop-up

ck theMe

1 Su

2 PoWin

r Key

131

P 5: Select a desired mode of Help key.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and press or

OK.• Press , and press or OK.

o use the screen pop-up functionfollowing shows an example of an operation toay a pop-up screen when you receive an incominghile an application screen is being displayed.

n Help Key Mode is set as Pop-up Window.

P 1: When you receive an incoming call whileediting a name list on Directory Menu, call indicator lamp and line key flash red.

STEP 2: To open the pop-up screen and cincoming call number, when you sKey Mode as Sub Menu, press display the menu screen and press sofWhen you set Help Key Mode as Window, press Help key.

The screen is displayed and you can cheincoming call information.nu Item Meaning

bMenuSet the Help key which displays sub menu (compatible mode with firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0.)

pup dow

Set the Help key which displays pop-up window

2

1

[Help Key Mode]

OKBack

Popup Window SubMenu

2

Answer

Line Key Answer Key Call Indicato

Menu

12345

MIC DND

Page 140: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

WheAnd

Not

132

• To answer the incoming call, lift the hand-set. If you do not answer the call and con-tinue to edit the name list of Directory,press key to display the menuscreen. And highlight Directory icon us-ing , and then press key.

n you finish a conversation, hang up the handset. you can go back to the screen of Directory.

e: Pop-up screen cannot be closed by pressing Exit Key.

Menu

Input a name.[Name]

BackBK

A

ABCDEOption OK

Page 141: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

5TOSEL(DYDIA

Dyn

STE

STE

STE

Pre

STE

top of

t hand-

Not

the fol-

t.

133

. FEATURE OPERATION

ORIGINATE A CALL USING ECTIVE DIALINGNAMIC DIAL PAD, PRESET L)

amic Dial Pad

P 1: Enter desired telephone number (Digit Keys0-9, *, and #).

P 2: LED on key lights and hear key touchtone.

P 3: The dialed number appears on the top ofLCD.

set Dial

P 1: Enter desired telephone number (Digit Keys0-9, *, and #).

STEP 2: The dialed number appears on theLCD.

STEP 3: Lift handset or press key.or

STEP 3: Press the originating Line Key and lifset.

e: Pressing the Speaker Key or going off-hook is notnecessary.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

2000

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330

Note: Originating call operation is cancelled by lowing Soft Key operation;- Press Exit key or Cancel Key.- Press Clear Key and cancel by one digi

Note: This feature cannot use on ITL-2E-1.

2000 Clr Cnl

Input Dial Number

Speaker

Page 142: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO CA(ON

STE

To P(AvaCalli

STE

STE

STE

STE

To VSTE

STE

DT7

feature. (! dis-

key aslays on

ey after.)

access:ed as as code.system

on withan pro-ension.

134

ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPEED LLINGE-TOUCH SPEED CALLING KEYS)

P 1: Press the desired One-Touch Speed Call-ing key, or press key and One-TouchSpeed Calling key.

rogramilable only on DT Series with One-Touch Speed ng key.)

P 2: Press key.

P 3: Press desired One-Touch Speed Callingkey.

P 4: Enter desired telephone number or featureaccess code on the keypad.Display indicates the digits dialed.

P 5: Press key again to save the number.

erifyP 1: Press key.

P 2: Press desired One-Touch Speed Callingkey.

STEP 3: Display indicates digits programmed.

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Feature

Feature

SPEED SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010 MIC DND >>>

Feature

Note: To program a hook switch for transfer or activation, press key as first digitplays on LCD.)

Note: To program a pause, press the any digit other than the first digit. (– dispLCD.)

Note: To program a Voice Call, press kdialing station number. (V displays on LCD

Note: One-Touch Speed Calling key for feature One-Touch Speed Calling key may be usfeature key by storing the feature accesThe features may be programmed on a basis by the Telephony Server Admin.Access codes may be stored in conjunctitelephone numbers. For example, you cgram one button to transfer to a certain ext

Recall

Recall

Transfer

Page 143: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

LCDSTE

WheSpeeuppechar

The One

E)

DIGITKEY

CH

AR

AC

TER

∗ #

∗ #

s which

135

Indication of DESI-less screenP 1: Press the desired One-Touch Speed Call-

ing key and originate a call.Registered name will be displayed as follows.For the key to which no name information isregistered, the character “SPD” will be dis-played.

n registering Name Information of One-touch d Calling, you can use uppercase alphabetic, rcase European or lowercase European

acters.

following tables show available characters for -Touch Speed Calling keys.

ALPHABETIC CHARACTER (UPPERCASE)

EUROPEAN CHARACTER (UPPERCAS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ∗ #

1 A D G J M P T W 0 ∗ #B E H K N Q U X @ &C F I L O R V Y . (

a d g j m S t Z , )

b e h k n p u w ’ [

c f i l o q v x : ]

2 3 4 5 6 r 8 y ; !

s z - ?

7 9 /

DIGIT KEY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

CH

AR

AC

TER

. A D G J M P T W 0, B E H K N Q U X: C F I L O R V Y! À È Ì 5 Ñ S Ù Z

? Á É Í Ò β Ú 9

- Â Ê Î Ó 7 Û+ Ã Ë Ï Ô Ü% Ä 3 4 Õ 8

& Å Ö/ Æ Œ( Ç Ø) 2 6=

¿¡1

Note: The shaded area indicates the charactercannot be entered.

Page 144: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

DIGITKEY

CH

AR

AC

TER

Not

136

EUROPEAN CHARACTER (LOWERCASE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ∗ #

. a d g j m p t w 0 ∗ #, b e h k n q u x: c f i l o r v y! à è ì 5 ñ s ù z

? á é í ò β ú 9

- â ê î ó 7 û+ ã ë ï ô ü% ä 3 4 õ 8

& å ö/ æ œ( ç ø) 2 6=

¿¡1

e: The shaded area indicates the characters whichcannot be entered.

Page 145: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO SPE

(Ava

STE

STE

STE

STE

n

in To (One-

EED

er.

Key

Callingred dig-

Not

Not

DT7

137

REGISTER NAME ON ONE-TOUCH ED CALLING KEY

ilable for DESI-less screen terminal.)

P 1: Press NAME.

P 2: Press desired One-Touch Speed Callingkey.

P 3: Enter desired name on the keypad.Display indicates the name entered.

P 4: Press SET to save the name.

To Register Speed Calling Number ODESI-less Screen

STEP 1: Follow the procedure of To programOriginate a Call Using Speed CallingTouch Speed Calling Keys).

TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPCALLING - STATION/GROUP

STEP 1: Press (Redial).

STEP 2: Press the desired speed calling numb

TO ORIGINATE A CALL USING SPEED CALLING - SYSTEM

To Program Speed Calling – System (On One-Touch Speed Calling Key)

STEP 1: Press key.

STEP 2: Press desired One-Touch Speed key. The LCD displays previously stoits.

e: To delete the entry, press DEL or BK key anddelete each one character.

e: To delete the whole setting, press CLEAR keyand back to idle status.

30 DT330

Push Speed Calling Key

NAME(*) >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

^ NEC BNET

SET CANCEL CLEAR >>>

NAME >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

XXXXXXLNR[ ]/SPD[_ _] –X*

MIC PICK FDA >>>

DT730/710 DT330/310

Feature

Page 146: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

To OKey

STE

STE

To O(Onlywith

STE

STE

138

P 3: Dial the “Speed Calling – System” accesscode and the abbreviated call code.

P 4: Press key again.

perate From Speed Calling – System

P 1: Press the “Speed Calling – System” key.

P 2: If the DT Series does not have the “SpeedCalling – System” key, dial the “Speed Calling– System” access code, then the abbreviatedcall code.

perate From Directory Key DT710 Series and DT310 Series are equipped

Directory key.)

P 1: Press key.

P 2: Dial the abbreviated call code (maximum of 4digits).

Feature

SPEED SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Directory

XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 147: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

ACTo ESTE

STE

STE

STE

To EAutSTE

STE

STE

STE

ive dial

service

10 dig-

ive dial

service

igits).

r.

Not

Not

e up to

f digitson and

139

COUNT CODE

nterP 1: Lift handset or press key, receive dial

tone.

P 2: Enter feature access code, receive serviceset tone.

P 3: Enter “Account Code” (up to 10 digits).

P 4: Receive dial tone and dial desired number.

nter Account Code After horization CodeP 1: Lift handset or press key, receive dial

tone.

P 2: Enter feature access code for “AuthorizationCode”, receive service set tone.

P 3: Enter “Authorization Code”, receive secondservice set tone.

P 4: Enter “Account Code”, receive dial tone, anddial desired number.

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

STEP 1: Lift handset or press key, recetone.

STEP 2: Enter feature access code, receive set tone.

STEP 3: Enter “Forced Account Code” (up to its), receive dial tone.

AUTHORIZATION CODE

To Enter Without Account CodeSTEP 1: Lift handset or press key, rece

tone.

STEP 2: Enter feature access code, receive set tone.

STEP 3: Enter “Authorization Code” (up to 10 d

STEP 4: Receive dial tone, dial desired numbe

- Or -

STEP 4: Lift handset, receive dial tone.

e: For North America, Account Codes can be up to24 digits.

e: Authorization and Account Codes may be up to20 digits combined (or 34 digits combined).

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Speaker

Note: For North America, Account Codes can b24 digits.

Note: For North America, the total number owhich can be entered for AuthorizatiAccount Codes is 34 digits.

DT730/710 DT330/310Speaker

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Page 148: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

To EServprog

VOSTE

STE

STE

STE

oft Key

d party.

Not

Not

a One-g One-tension,s if pro-ave by

Call ises:

tation is

140

P 5: Dial desired number.

P 6: If an “Authorization Code” is required, callerhears special dial tone.

P 7: Enter “Authorization Code”, or call will be de-nied.

nter With Account Code (see above)ice set tone is optional depending upon system ramming.

ICE CALL

P 1: Lift handset.

P 2: Dial desired station number.

P 3: Press Voice.

P 4: Speak to called party.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Lift handset.

STEP 2: Dial desired station number; VOICE Sappears while station is ringing.

STEP 3: Press VOICE Soft Key. Speak to calle

e: This option is available only if system is pro-grammed with Least Cost Routing.

e: If a 4-, 8-, 16- or 32-button display terminal isused, the display indicates all of the digits dialed.

DT730/710 DT330/310

VOICE 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: A Voice Call may be programmed on Touch Speed Calling key by pressinTouch Speed Calling key, dialing the exand pressing the key. (V displaygramming on an DT Series with LCD. Spressing One-Touch Speed Calling key.)

Note: If called party is on their line when a Voiceattempted, calling station's display indicat

Note: A voice call is restricted if called party's snot a DT Series. Display indicates:

2000

MIC >>>VOICE1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Transfer

VOICE BUSY1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

VOICE REST1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 149: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOFRESTE

STE

STE

AU

To ISTE

STE

STE

coming

key.

tercom placingy).

Call

r press

Not

DT7

ker

141

ANSWER A VOICE CALL HANDS E

P 1: Receive incoming Voice Call.

P 2: Press the MIC Soft Key or key. LEDlights.

P 3: Respond hands-free.

TOMATIC INTERCOM

nitiateP 1: Lift handset or press key.

P 2: Press the AICM key.

P 3: Hear ringback tone.

To AnswerSTEP 1: AICM key flashes red indicating an in

intercom call.

STEP 2: Press AICM, lift handset or press LED lights solid green.

STEP 3: If called station is engaged in a non-incall, the station may press AICM afteroriginal caller on hold (with ke

To Bridge Into An Automatic Intercom

STEP 1: Press the AICM key, lift handset o key.

e: If privacy is required, lift handset.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Mic

Calling station

VOICE 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Called party

ICM 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: Bridging is an optional feature.

Overriding party

ICM 11:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Spea

HOLD

Speaker

Overriding party

OVERRIDE 11:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 150: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

MA

To ISTE

STE

To ASTE

STE

STE

tercom placingy).

ll

key.

d.

DT7

station unnec-

buttonate sig- for the

ker

142

P 2: A three-party conference is established.

NUAL INTERCOM

nitiateP 1: Press MICM, lift handset or press key,

ringback tone is heard.

P 2: Press the SIG key if it is desired for the calledstation to hear ringing.

nswerP 1: MICM key flashes, indicating an incoming

call. Ring tone may also be heard.

P 2: Press MICM.

P 3: Lift handset or press key, LED lights

solid green.

STEP 4: If called station is engaged in a non-incall, the station may press MICM afteroriginal caller on hold (with ke

To Bridge Into A Manual Intercom Ca

STEP 1: Press MICM, lift handset or press

STEP 2: A three-party conference is establishe

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Called party

ICM 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Calling party

ICM 11:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Note: Bridging is an optional feature.

Note: The SIG key signals the correspondingwhen speaking over the intercom path isessary.

Note: Two-button Manual Intercom provides onefor signalling and one for talking. A separnaling button can be used in many wayssecretary to alert a boss, or vice versa.

HOLD

Spea

Overriding party

OVERRIDE 11:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 151: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

DIATo ISTE

STE

STE

To ASTE

STE

STE

STE

r press

d.

groupe calledg their

143

L INTERCOM

nitiateP 1: Lift handset or press the key.

P 2: Press DICM key.

P 3: Dial desired intercom station number. Re-ceive ringback tone.

nswerP 1: DICM LED flashes, indicating an incoming in-

tercom call.

P 2: Press DICM.

P 3: Lift handset or press key. LCD showssolid green.

P 4: If called station is engaged in a non-intercomcall, the station may press DICM after placingthe original call on hold (with key.)

To Bridge Into A Dial Intercom Call

STEP 1: Press the DICM key, lift handset o key.

STEP 2: A three-party conference is establishe

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Called party

ICM 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

HOLD

Calling party

ICM 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: Bridging is an optional feature.

Note: Dial intercom provides a Dial Intercomwhere each member of the group may bby a 1- or 2-digit number without usinprime lines.

Speaker

Overriding party

OVERRIDE 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 152: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

COSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

STE

STE

L

to con-aller is

l caller. hold.

le to al-

L

amp-onED of

placed

lished.

al call.

Not or trunk

144

NFERENCE

P 1: With call in progress, ask party to hold.

P 2: Press key, receive interrupted dialtone.

P 3: Dial desired number.

P 4: After call is answered, press key. TheLED lights.

P 5: Three-way conference is established.

g Soft KeyP 1: With a call in progress, press key and

dial desired number.

P 2: After call is answered, press CONF Soft Key.Three-way conference is established.

P 3: If one party hang up, other two remain con-

nected. Conf LED goes out.

TO ESTABLISH A BROKER CAL

STEP 1: While engaged in a call and wishing sult a third party, press key. Cautomatically placed on hold.

STEP 2: Dial desired party to consult.

STEP 3: Press key to return to originaThird party is automatically placed on

STEP 4: By repeating these steps, it is possibternate between calls.

TO ANSWER A CAMPED-ON CAL

STEP 1: While engaged in a call, receive the cindication (one short tone burst). L

key flashes.

STEP 2: Press key. Call in progress ison hold.

STEP 3: Connection to camped-on call is estab

STEP 4: Press key to return to originCamped-on call is placed on hold.

e: The Conf key is accommodated on only DTL-2E-1, ITL-2E-1 and DTL-6DE-1. If using the termi-

nals without key, use a soft key or pro-grammable feature key to which conferencefeature has been assigned.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Transfer

Conf

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Conf

Transfer

CONF

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: The display indicates connected station at any given time.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Transfer

Transfer

DT730/710 DT330/310

Answer

Answer

Answer

Page 153: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

CA

To PTouSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

To ASTE

n.

ive dial

tone.

Not

DT7

145

P 5: By repeating these steps, it is possible to al-ternate between calls. Display indicates con-nected station or trunk at any given time.

LL WAITING - ORIGINATING

rogram Call Waiting Key (On One-ch Speed Calling Key)P 1: Press key.

P 2: Press desired One-Touch Speed Callingkey.

P 3: Press key.! appears on LCD.

P 4: Dial “Call Waiting” feature access code.

P 5: Press key.

ctivate Call Waiting – OriginatingP 1: Dial desired station number, receive busy

tone.

STEP 2: Press CALL WAITING.

STEP 3: Receive special ringback tone.

STEP 4: Call waiting tone is sent to busy statio

– Or –

STEP 4: Lift handset or press key.

STEP 5: Dial “Call Waiting” access code, recetone.

STEP 6: Dial busy station.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Dial desired station and receive busy

e: To program a hook switch for transfer or featureactivation, press as first digit. “!” dis-plays on LCD.

typeTrunk

numberTrunk

CAMP ON DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Feature

Recall

Feature

Recall

Called stationnumber

C WAIT 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

C WAIT1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

C WAIT SET 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 154: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

To ASTE

STE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

STE

tomati-

146

P 2: Press CW Soft Key receive call waiting ring-back tone.

nswer A Waiting CallP 1: Call Waiting Tone is heard.

P 2: Press key.

P 3: Waiting call is automatically connected. Orig-inal party is placed on hold.

P 4: By repeatedly pressing key, it is pos-sible to alternate between calls. Display indi-cates connected station or trunk at any giventime.

g Soft KeyP 1: Hear burst of tone Display indicates “C WAIT”

and key flashes.

P 2: Press key receive call waiting tone.

To DisconnectSTEP 1: Press key. Station user is au

cally connected to original party.

Called stationnumber

C WAIT SET 2000

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Answer

Answer

Calling stationnumber

C WAIT 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Answer

Answer

Calling stationnumber

C WAIT 2001

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Recall

Page 155: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CATo PSpeSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

To PSTE

To ROrigSTE

STE

mote

all.

147

LL PARK

rogram Call Park Key (On One-Touch ed Calling Key)P 1: Press key.

P 2: Press One-Touch Speed Calling key.

P 3: Press key. “!” displays on LCD.

P 4: Dial “Call Park” access code.

P 5: Press key again.

ark A CallP 1: While connected to a station or trunk, press

CALL PARK.

etrieve A Parked Call From inating Station

P 1: Dial “Call Park” local retrieval code.

P 2: Station user is connected to parked call.

To Retrieve A Parked Call From A ReStationSTEP 1: Dial “Call Park” local retrieval code.

STEP 2: Station user is connected to parked c

DT730/710 DT330/310

Feature

Recall

Feature

Parked stationor trunk

CALLPARK SET DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Elapsed time

10:01 DDD 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

parked the callStation that

2000 DDD 21:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 156: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CA

WheSTE

STE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

STE

.

.

station

and the

hed.

on hold

DT7

148

LL PICK-UP (GROUP)

n Station Within Pick-up Group RingsP 1: Lift handset.

P 2: Press CALL PICK-UP or dial “Call Pick-up”access code (may be stored on One-TouchSpeed Calling key).

P 3: Connection to calling party is established.

P 4: If currently on a call, press key anddial “Call Pick-up” access code.The original party is placed on hold.

g Soft KeyP 1: Lift handset and press PICK Soft Key.

P 2: Connection to calling party is established.

CALL PICK-UP (DIRECT)

To Program Pick-up Direct Key (One-Touch Speed Calling Key)STEP 1: Press key.

STEP 2: Press One-Touch Speed Calling key

STEP 3: Dial “Direct Call Pick-up” access code

STEP 4: Press key again.

When A Station Within System RingsSTEP 1: Lift handset, receive dial tone.

STEP 2: Press PICK-DIRECT and dial the number to be picked up.

– Or –

STEP 2: Dial “Direct Call Pick-up” access code station number to be picked up.

STEP 3: Connection to calling party is establis

STEP 4: If busy, original call must be placed before new call can be picked up.

30/710 DT330/310

Transfer

stationCalling

partyCalled

PICK UP 32000 DDD1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

stationCalling

partyCalled

PICK UP 2001

MIC >>>

2000 1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

Feature

Feature

stationCalling

partyCalled

PICK UP 32000 DDD1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 157: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

OU

If TrSTE

STE

STE

OF

STE

STE

STE

STE

ne.

ne and

DT7

DT7TL-2E-

149

TGOING TRUNK QUEUING

unk Is BusyP 1: Receive Trunk Busy indication. Press CALL

BACK. Call is placed in queue for next avail-able trunk.

P 2: When trunk is available, setting station isalerted by ringing and flashing red LED.

P 3: Press key or lift handset. Dial tone isheard or number is automatically dialed ifLeast Cost Routing is provided.

F-HOOK TRUNK QUEUING

P 1: Press key, receive dial tone.

P 2: Dial desired telephone number. Encounter atrunk busy condition.

P 3: Station user receives service set tone andleaves speaker on.

P 4: The desired number is automatically dialedwhen a trunk becomes available.

EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE

If Called Station Is BusySTEP 1: Press OVERRIDE.

STEP 2: Interrupted parties receive warning to

STEP 3: Three-way conference is initiated.

STEP 4: Conf LED lights.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press E-OVR Soft Key.

STEP 2: Interrupted parties receive warning tothree-way conference is initiated.

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

OG-Q SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Note: The Conf key is accommodated on only D1, ITL-2E-1 and DTL-6DE-1.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Overridden station

OVERRIDE 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

OVERRIDE 2001

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 158: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

LAS

To RSTE

STE

STE

STE

LS

MULTI-

g – Allial dial

ephone

the DTetting).

ll Calls

tone.

ne.

Not

Not

DT7

150

T NUMBER REDIAL

ecall Last Number DialedP 1: Press key. Last number dialed is dis-

played.

P 2: Press key until desired number is dis-played. Up to 5 previously dialed numbers.

P 3: Press # or . The number on the display isautomatically redialed.

P 4: When party has answered, lift handset orspeak hands-free.

CALL FORWARDING - ALL CAL

To SetSTEP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone.

STEP 2: If setting for another station, press LINE APPEARANCE.

STEP 3: Press FWD or dial “Call ForwardinCalls” access code. Receive spectone.

STEP 4: Dial destination station or external telnumber. Receive service set tone.

STEP 5: FWD LED lights (at your station or atSeries of the multiline station you are s

STEP 6: Press key. Call Forwarding – Ais set.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press FDA Soft Key. Receive special

STEP 2: Dial destination; wait for service set to

e: Override may be programmed by the TelephonyServer Admin. for one of the Programmable fea-ture keys, or may be programmed on a One-Touch Speed Calling key by storing the Recalland Override access code.

e: A-law Countries [Europe, Australia, Russia, LatinAmerica, Middle near East, other Asian nations]:#µ-law Countries [North America, Japan, HongKong, Taiwan]:

30/710 DT330/310

Redial

LNR[# or ]/SPD[_ _] –XXXXXXX

MIC PICK FDA >>>

Redial

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Speaker

Forwardingstation

FORWARD SET 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 159: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

To VSTE

STE

To CSTE

STE

STE

WARD

Not

151

P 3: “FORWARD SET” is displayed, call forward-ing for all calls is set.

erify (Only For Terminal With LCD)P 1: Press FWD.

P 2: Display indicates the station number calls areforwarded to.

ancelP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone. If can-

celing for another station, press MULTILINEAPPEARANCE.

P 2: Press FWD or dial “Call Forwarding – AllCalls” cancel code. Receive service set tone.LED goes out at your station (or the DT Se-ries of the multiline station).

P 3: Press key. Call Forwarding – All Callsis cancelled.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press FDA Soft Key.

STEP 2: Receive service set tone and “FORCANCEL” is displayed.

e: With Soft Key operation, FDB flashes on the dis-play.

FORWARD SET

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Forwardingstation

FORWARD 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Speaker

FORWARD CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

FORWARD CANCEL

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 160: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CA

To SSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

STE

STE

D)

alls are

If can-TILINE

rding –ice set

the DT

DT7

the dis-

152

LL FORWARDING - BUSY LINE

etP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone.

P 2: If setting for another station, press MULTI-LINE APPEARANCE.

P 3: Press FWD-BY or dial “Call Forwarding –Busy Line” access code. Receive special dialtone.

P 4: Dial destination station or external telephonenumber. Receive service set tone.

P 5: FWD-BY LED lights (at your station or at theDT Series of the multiline station you are set-ting).

P 6: Press key. Call Forwarding – BusyLine is set.

g Soft KeyP 1: Press FDB Soft Key. Receive special dial

tone.

P 2: Dial destination; wait for service set tone.

P 3: “FORWARD SET” is displayed; Call Forward-

ing – Busy Line is set.

To Verify (Only For Terminal With LCSTEP 1: Press FWD-BY.

STEP 2: Display indicates the station number cforwarded to.

To CancelSTEP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone.

celing for another station, press MULAPPEARANCE.

STEP 2: Press FWD-BY or dial “Call ForwaBusy Line” cancel code. Receive servtone. LED goes out at your station (orSeries of the multiline station).

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Speaker

FORWARD SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: With Soft Key operation, FDB flashes on play.

FORWARD SET

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Forwarding station

FORWARD 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Page 161: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

UsinSTE

STE

CAL

To SSTE

STE

STE

STE

r at theare set-

– Don’t

ial dial

ne.

orward-

D)MULTI-

DT7

153

P 3: Press key. Call Forwarding – BusyLine is cancelled.

g Soft KeyP 1: Press FDB Soft Key.

P 2: Receive service set tone and “FORWARDCANCEL” is displayed.

L FORWARDING - DON’T ANSWER

etP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone.

P 2: If setting for another station, press MULTI-LINE APPEARANCE.

P 3: Press FWD-NA or dial “Call Forwarding –Don’t Answer” access code. Receive specialdial tone.

P 4: Dial destination station or external telephonenumber. Receive service set tone.

STEP 5: FWD-NA LED lights (at your station oDT Series of the multiline station you ting).

STEP 6: Press key. Call Forwarding Answer is set.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press FDN Soft Key. Receive spec

tone.

STEP 2: Dial destination; wait for service set to

STEP 3: “FORWARD SET” is displayed; Call Fing – Don’t Answer is set.

To Verify (Only For Terminal With LCSTEP 1: If verifying for another station, press

LINE APPEARANCE while idle.

STEP 2: Press FWD-NA.

Speaker

FORWARD CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

FORWARD CANCEL

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Speaker

Forwarding station

FORWARD SET 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

FORWARD SET

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 162: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

To CSTE

STE

STE

LL

Out IPe.

ive ser-

key.ation is

ial Dial

D SET”

Not

Not r

154

P 3: Display indicates the station number calls areforwarded to.

ancelP 1: Press key. Receive dial tone. If can-

celing for another station, press MULTILINEAPPEARANCE.

P 2: Press FWD-NA or dial "Call Forwarding -Don't Answer" cancel code. Receive serviceset tone. LED goes out at your station (or theDT Series of the multiline station).

P 3: Press key. Call Forwarding – Don’tAnswer is cancelled.

LOGGED OUT IP STATION - CADESTINATION To SetSTEP 1: Lift handset or press key.

STEP 2: Press the FDL Key or dial “Logged Station – Call Destination” access cod

STEP 3: Dial destination station number; recevice set tone.

STEP 4: Replace handset or press Logged Out IP Station – Call Destinset.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press FDL Soft Key; receive spec

Tone.

STEP 2: Dial destination station number.

STEP 3: Receive service set tone; “FORWARis displayed.

e: Call Forwarding for Busy Line and Don't Answermay be combined depending upon system pro-gramming.

e: With Soft Key operation, FDB flashes on the dis-play.

Forwarding station

FORWARD 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Speaker

FORWARD CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730

Speaker

Speake

FORWARD SET XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

FORWARD SET XXXX

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 163: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To VSTE

STE

To CSTE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

et tone.

ive ser-

ination”ppears

Not

155

erify (Only For Terminal with LCD)P 1: Press “Logged Out IP Station – Call Destina-

tion” feature key lit red or press FDL.

P 2: Display indicates the station number calls areforwarded.

ancelP 1: Lift handset or press key; receive Dial

Tone.

P 2: Press the FDL Key or dial “Logged Out IPStation – Call Destination” cancel code; re-ceive service set tone.

P 3: Replace handset or press key.Logged Out IP Station – Call Destination iscanceled.

g Soft KeyP 1: Lift handset or press key; receive Dial

Tone.

STEP 2: Press FDL Soft Key; receive service s

STEP 3: Dial destination station number; recevice set tone.

STEP 4: “Logged Out IP Station – Call Destlamp goes off and FDL indication disaon the LCD.

e: With Soft Key Operation, FDL flashes on the dis-play.

FORWARD XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Speaker

FORWARD CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

FORWARD CANCEL

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 164: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CAIf CSTE

– Or

STE

STE

STE

ice set

the CB

ER

stored.

ory.

lephony key or

ng key.

156

LL BACK

alled Station is BusyP 1: Press CALL BACK. Receive service set tone.

P 1: Press the FLASH key and enter “Call Back”access code.

P 2: When both parties become idle, calling par-ty's phone rings. Calling party would go offhook and hear ring back tone.The called station would then be ringing.

P 3: Connection is established when the calledparty answers.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press CB Soft Key and receive serv

tone.

STEP 2: “CALLBACK SET” is displayed and Soft Key flashes on the display.

TO SAVE AND REPEAT A NUMB

To SaveSTEP 1: Press key.

STEP 2: Dial desired telephone number.

STEP 3: Press S&R. Dialed number is now S&R LED lights.

– Or –

STEP 3: Receive internal call.

STEP 4: Press S&R. Number is stored in mem

DT730/710 DT330/310

Called party

CALLBACK SET 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Called party

CALLBACK 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Called party

CALLBACK 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Note: Call Back may be programmed by the TeServer Admin. on a Programmable featureby the user on a One-Touch Speed Calli

CALLBACK SET

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Page 165: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

UsinSTE

STE

To VSTE

STE

To RSTE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

Not

157

P 5: S&R LED lights.

g Soft KeyP 1: Press S&R. Number is stored in memory.

P 2: S&R LED lights.

erify (Only For Terminal With LCD)P 1: While idle, press S&R.

P 2: Display indicates digits sorted.

epeatP 1: Press key.

P 2: Press S&R. DT Series automatically redialsthe programmed number.

P 3: S&R automatically cancelled. LED goes out.

g Soft KeyP 1: Press flashing S&R Soft Key. Stored number

is automatically redialed. “S&R” disappearsfrom display.

e: If saved number is busy or no answer is received,to save it again, press S&R again before hangingup.

Speaker

Page 166: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

STE

essag-

press

e is au-

ing thessage.

Not

Not

Not

DT7

158

LEAVE A MESSAGE

P 1: Press key. Receive dial tone.

P 2: Dial desired station number. Encounter noanswer or busy condition.

P 3: Press MSG. Message is sent to called DT Se-ries.

P 4: Called station MSG LED lights.

TO ANSWER A MESSAGE

To DisplaySTEP 1: MSG LED is lit. Station is idle.

STEP 2: Press MSG.

STEP 3: Re-press MSG to display additional mes in order received.

To RespondSTEP 1: While displaying desired message,

key.

STEP 2: Press MSG. Station which left messagtomatically redialed.

STEP 3: Message is erased.

To EraseSTEP 1: To erase a message without return

call, press MSG to display desired me

e: Up to four messages can be stored in DT Seriesmemory.

e: If a fifth message is attempted, reorder tone isheard and display indicates as follows:

e: If station is not equipped to receive messages,reorder tone is heard and display indicates as fol-lows:

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

Called station

MESSAGE SET 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

MESSAGE BUSY1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

MESSAGE REST1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

stationCalling

MSG 2001 12:28PM1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Speaker

Page 167: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

VO

To SSTE

STE

STE

STE

To OSTE

STE

menu

(En-

access

ials

ontinu-

Not

DT7

159

P 2: Dial # or while message displays. Mes-sage is erased.

ICE MAIL SYSTEM

etP 1: Press key.

P 2: Press (Enter) or key.

P 3: Dial desired “Voice Mail System” accesscode.

P 4: Press key again.

riginateP 1: Press key.

P 2: Hear ringback tone.

– Or –

STEP 2: Press (Enter) key. The Shortcutscreen is displayed on LCD.

STEP 3: Select Voice Mail and then press ter), (Right-cursor) or OK soft key toa preset Voice Mail System.

STEP 4: Hear ringback tone.

MEET-ME PAGING

Example: Station A can page Station B. When Station B danswer code, they are connected.

To Page (Station A)STEP 1: Dial “Paging” access code, receive c

ous ringback for one second.

STEP 2: Page station B.

STEP 3: Remain off hook or hang up.

e: If station that left message is busy, callback orMSG may be set. If station that left messagedoes not answer, MSG may be set, notifying orig-inating party that a message return wasattempted.

MESSAGE CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Feature

Message

Feature

SPEED SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Message

2

DT730/710 DT330/310

Trunk number

PAGING 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 168: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To AIf StaSTE

If StaSTE

STE

PAG

ExamStatinot aStatianno

ted dial

ontinu-

, and isnounc-

Not

DT7

160

nswer (Station B)tion A remains off hook

P 1: Station B dials “Paging” answer code, andthey are immediately connected.

tion A hung upP 1: Station B dial “Paging” answer code, and Sta-

tion A DT Series rings.

P 2: When station A goes off-hook, they are con-nected.

ING TRANSFER

ple:on A receives an important call for Station B who is t a desk. Station A can page Station B. When

on B dials the Paging answer code, Station A can unce the call and transfer it to Station B.

Station A PagingSTEP 1: Ask calling party to hold.

STEP 2: Press key. Receive interruptone.

STEP 3: Dial “Paging” access code. Receive cous ringback for one second.

STEP 4: Page Station B.

STEP 5: Remain off-hook or hang up.

To Answer (Station B)If Station A remained off hookSTEP 1: Station B dials “Paging” answer code

connected with Station A. Station A anes call.

e: Paging function can not be supported with IPenabled DT700 Series.

PAGING 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Calling trunknumber

TRANSFER DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Transfer

Stations A and B each displaythe other’s number

TRANSFER XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 169: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

If StaSTE

STE

STE

– Or

(Dep

STE

161

P 2: Station A hangs up. Station B and the callingparty are connected.

tion A hung upP 1: Station B dials “Paging” answer code. Station

A DT Series rings.

P 2: Station A picks up and announces call.

P 3: Station A hangs up. Station B and the callingparty are connected.

endent on System Programming)

P 3: Station B dials “Paging” answer code, and isimmediately connected to the calling party.

DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Stations A and B each displaythe other’s number, flashing

TRANSFER DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Calling trunk number

DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

PAGING DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 170: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

BO

SecSTE

STE

STE

If BoSTE

STE

If BoSTE

arty to

No ser-

y to

ey and

eceive

DT7

162

SS/SECRETARY TRANSFER

retaryP 1: Lift handset, press boss’ ringing line. Ask call-

ing party to hold.

P 2: Press boss’ line again. “Voice Call” is auto-matically established.

P 3: Announce the call to the boss.

ss Accepts CallP 1: Secretary replaces handset.

P 2: Secretary presses boss’ line to return to call-ing party.

ss Refuses CallP 1: Secretary presses boss’ line to return to call-

ing party.

BOSS/SECRETARY - MW LAMPCONTROL

To Set MW at Boss’ StationWith caller on the lineSTEP 1: Lift handset or press key.

STEP 2: Press boss’ ringing line. Ask calling phold.

STEP 3: Press the MW-SET line/feature key. vice set tone is heard.

Boss sees MW on display and can call secretarreceive message.

Without caller on the lineSTEP 1: After taking message, press k

receive dial tone.

STEP 2: Press the MW-SET line/feature key. Rservice set tone.

30/710 DT330/310

Calling party

DDD 31:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Boss and secretary station eachdisplay the other’s number

ICM XXXX1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

Speaker

MW SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Recall

MW SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 171: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To CWithSTE

STE

STE

WithSTE

, but is

Key

ey.

s code.

.

aller to

eceive

Not

Transfer

163

ancel At Boss’ Station caller on the lineP 1: Lift handset or press key. Receive dial

tone.

P 2: Press Boss’ line appearance.

P 3: Press MW-CANCEL line/feature key. Re-ceive service set tone.

caller on the lineP 1: While engaged in conversation on boss’ mul-

tiline, press MW-CANCEL key. No serviceset tone is heard.

BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE

Example:Station 2000 is boss, Station 2001 is secretary.Boss is connected to Trunk A.Incoming call on Trunk B connects to secretaryintended for boss.

To Program Boss/Secretary OverrideSTEP 1: Press key.

STEP 2: Press a One-Touch Speed Calling k

STEP 3: Dial “Boss/Secretary Override” acces

STEP 4: Press key. – displays on LCD

STEP 5: Dial boss’ station number.

STEP 6: Press key again.

SecretarySTEP 1: Lift handset to answer Trunk B, ask c

hold.

STEP 2: Press CALL HOLD feature key or key and dial call hold access code. RDial Tone.

e: The secretary can hang up after taking a mes-sage, and set a message lamp at any time bygoing off-hook on the boss’ multiline and press-ing the MW-SET key.

Speaker

MW CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

MW CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DT730/710 DT330/310

Feature

Recall

Feature

Page 172: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

BosSTE

OptiSTE

STE

STE

OptiSTE

STE

p.

parties

of tone,

es with

y to re-

s when

0/310

164

P 3: Press BOSS/SEC OVERRIDE. ReceiveRingback Tone.

sP 1: Hear 3 bursts of tone. LCD indicates:

on 1P 1: Boss presses key and converses with

secretary. Trunk A is placed on hold.

P 2: Secretary hangs up. Boss is connected toTrunk B.

P 3: Boss can alternate between the two partiesby pressing key.

on 2P 1: Boss presses key and converses with

secretary. Trunk A is placed on hold.

P 2: Boss presses station 01 key and converseswith Trunk B. Boss presses key to re-

connect to Trunk A.

STEP 3: Secretary hears reorder tone, hangs u

STEP 4: Boss can alternate between the twoby pressing key.

Option 3STEP 1: If boss does not respond to 3 bursts

secretary presses key.

STEP 2: Secretary is connected to Trunk B.

Option 4STEP 1: Boss presses key and convers

Secretary. Trunk A is placed on hold.

STEP 2: Boss denies call, presses keturn to Trunk A.

STEP 3: Secretary is returned to Trunk B.

DO NOT DISTURB

While Idle (On Hook)STEP 1: Press DND. LED lights.

Boss’ stationnumber

C WAIT 20001:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Secretary’s stationnumber

C WAIT 20011:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Answer

Answer

Answer

Answer

Note: With Soft Key operation, "DND" flasheset.

Answer

Recall

Answer

Transfer

DT730/710 DT33

DND SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 173: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To CSTE

UsinSTE

display ng Call g a direct stina-ns-r being

swer to

isplays

ey.

and the.

swer to

Not only.

/310

165

ancelP 1: Press DND. LED goes out.

g Soft KeyP 1: Press flashing DND Soft Key.

CALL REDIRECT

Example: DT Series Station A views on the DT Series the Station Number or Caller ID of an Incomiand immediately redirects the call by pressinFunction Key. The destination of the Call Rewill be the Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer Detion or the Recall Destination if the call is traferred without Call Forwarding-Don’t Answeset at the station.

Call Redirect To Call Forward-Don’t Answer DestinationSTEP 1: Station A sets Call Forward-Don’t An

Station B.

STEP 2: Station C dials Station A, it rings and dStation C’s number on the display.

STEP 3: Station A presses the Call Redirect K

STEP 4: REDIRECT is displayed on the LCD, call immediately forwards to Station B

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Station A sets Call Forward-Don’t An

Station B.

e: DND must be programmed by the TelephonyServer Admin. on a Programmable feature key.

DND CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

DND CANCEL

MIC DND >>>Note: This feature is available in North America

DT730/710 DT330

Page 174: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

- Or

CallIs TrAnsSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

UsinSTE

STE

STE

STE

STE

for the

flashes

for the

utomat-

166

P 2: Station C dials Station A, it rings and displaysStation C’s number on the display.

P 3: Station A presses the REDIR Soft Key.

P 4: REDIRECT is displayed on the LCD, and thecall immediately forwards to Station B.

-

Redirect to Recall Destination When Call ansferred Without Call Forwarding-Don't wer Being SetP 1: Station B calls Station C.

P 2: Station C answers the call and transfers it toStation A and then releases the call.

P 3: Station A rings.

P 4: Station A presses the Call Redirect Key.

P 5: REDIRECTING is displayed on Station A andthe call immediately recalls to Station C.

g Soft KeyP 1: Station B calls Station C.

P 2: Station C answers the call and transfers it toStation A and then releases the call.

P 3: Station A rings.

P 4: Station A presses the REDIR Soft Key.

P 5: REDIRECTING is displayed on Station A andthe call immediately recalls to Station C.

PRIVACY

While Off-HookSTEP 1: Press DND. LED lights.

STEP 2: Privacy feature prevents interruptionsduration of the call.

Using Soft KeySTEP 1: Press flashing DND Soft Key. “DND”

when set.

STEP 2: Privacy feature prevents interruptionsduration of the call.

To CancelSTEP 1: Press DND. LED goes out.

– Or –

STEP 1: Replace handset. Privacy feature is aically cancelled.

DT730/710 DT330/310

PRIVACY SET1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

PRIVACY SET

MIC >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

PRIVACY CANCEL1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 175: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

UsinSTE

PR

ExamDap

STE

tation

key.

of Sta-

ter the

parties

.

Not

Not

DT7

ker

167

g Soft KeyP 1: Press flashing DND Soft Key.

IVACY RELEASE

ple: T Series Station B is engaged in a conversation, nd allows DT Series Station A to enter the call in rogress.

P 1: Station A lifts handset or presses key.Station A presses the line appearance of Sta-tion B.Warning tone is sent to the interrupted par-ties (optional).A three-way conference is established.

– OR –

Example: DT Series Station A requests entrance into SB’s call in progress.

STEP 1: Station A lifts handset or presses

STEP 2: Station A presses the line appearancetion B.

STEP 3: Station B LCD indicates as follows:

STEP 4: Station B may allow Station A to enconversation by pressing P-RLS.

STEP 5: Warning tone is sent to the interrupted(optional).

STEP 6: A three-way conference is established

e: DND must be programmed by the TelephonyServer Admin. on a Programmable feature key.

e: Station A may also be a single-line station aslong as it appears on the Station B DT Series.

PRIVACY CANCEL

MIC DND >>>1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

30/710 DT330/310

Speaker

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Spea

WAIT P-RLS?1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

P-RLS?1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

CONF1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Page 176: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

cal

The

to 100 entries digits 4

in Idle

Not

Not

LCD.

s the For

168

PHONEBOOK

There are two types of Phonebook features: LoPhonebook and System Phonebook.

System PhonebookSystem Phonebook is used on a system basis. data entry is made by the Telephony Server Administrator.

Local PhonebookLocal Phonebook is used on a station basis. Upentries are available per station. You can make with key operation from the telephone. Up to 32can be registered for each dial number. Up to 2characters can be registered for each name.

• SYSTEM PHONEBOOK

To Search And Make A Call

Example: To Search For “NEC BNET”.

STEP 1: Press Pbook soft key while Station isstate.

e: Station A can be a single-line station if it appearson the Station B DT Series.

e: Up to six parties can break into a two-party con-versation (additional devise is required).

Note: This feature is available for DT series with

Note: When the system administrator invalidatePhonebook, this feature cannot be used. details contact the system administrator.

DT730/710 DT330/310

Page 177: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

K soft

Not

e Menu

screen,

oretween

169

If Local Phonebook is enabled by the setting on the system side, go to STEP2.If Local Phonebook is disabled by the setting on the system side, go to STEP 3.

- OR -

Press key to display the Menu screen. On the Menu screen, select Directory.

If Local Phonebook is enabled by the setting on the system side, go to STEP 2.If Local Phone is disabled, the display changes as follows. In that case, select System and go to STEP 3.

STEP 2: Press Sys soft key.

STEP 3: Enter a name and then press or Okey to perform a search.

Ex. To enter “NEC”:Press key twice to enter “N”.Press key four times to enter “E“.Press key twice to enter “C“.e: Select an item on the menu screen in either of

the following two ways.• Press an appropriate digit key.• Highlight a desired item and then press

or OK soft key.

Pbook MIC DND

1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Menu

2

History

Back OK

12

Tool3Directory

2

Note: This feature cannot be activated from thkey on DT710 Series (ITL-6DE-1).

Note: If “>>>” soft Key is pressed on the above

the following soft keys appear. Pressing Eu-s/Eu-l soft key shifts characters buppercase and lowercase.

Personal

Back OK

12

Corporate3System

PhonebookLocal Sys Cnl

632

Name:

>>>OKClr→NEC

Page 178: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

Not

Not

screen igits ble limit yed at a eds the y to ame/

ractersits

170

P 4: A result of the search is displayed. Press or UP/DOWN soft key to scroll the result.

P 5: When “NEC BNET” appears, press , or OK soft key.

P 6: The registered Phonebook data for “NEC BNET” appears. From this screen, you can make a call by going off-hook or pressing

key.

e: To delete an entered character, press or Clrsoft key.

e: To move the cursor one space to the right, press key or “→” soft key once

<<< -Eu-s Cnl

(Lower-case character)

<<< -Eu-l Cnl

(Upper-case character)

Name: NEC

CnlOKDOWNNEC ABIKOUP

NEC BNETCnlOK

Name: NEC

DOWNUP

Speaker

Note: More soft key appears in Phonebook data when the number of characters (name) or d(telephone number) are exceeding displaya(Up to 17 characters or digits can be displatime). If the name or telephone number excedisplayable limit, press or More soft kedisplay the last 17 characters/digits of the ntelephone number.Example: Name Suzuki Taro(JapanSumida) ¨ 24 chaNumber: 01234567890123456789 ¨ 20 dig

(Display area)Name: Suzuki Taro(JapanSumida)Number: 01234567890123456789

(Display area)Name: Suzuki Taro(JapanSumida)Number: 01234567890123456789

CnlNumber: XXXXXXXXName: NEC BNET

More

NameNumberMore Cnl >>>

: Suzuki Taro(Japan01234567890123456:

NameNumberMore Cnl >>>

: Taro(JapanSumida)34567890123456789:

Page 179: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• L

To A

ExamDT Sits Te

STE

STE

ess

K soft

Notscreen,

oretween

171

OCAL PHONEBOOK

dd New Data

ple: eries Station A registers “NEC” as new name and lephone Number.

P 1: Press Pbook soft key or (Directory) keywhile Station is in Idle state.

- OR -

Press key to display the Menu screen. On the Menu screen, select Directory.

P 2: Press Local soft key.

STEP 3: Local Phonebook screen appears. PrAdd soft key.

STEP 4: Enter a name and then press or Okey.

Ex. To enter “NEC”:Press key twice to enter “N”.Press key twice to enter “E“.Press key three times to enter “C“.

e: Select an item on the menu screen in either ofthe following two ways.

• Press an appropriate digit key.• Highlight a desired item and then press

or OK soft key.

Pbook MIC DND1:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

Menu

2

History

Back OK

12

Tool3Directory

Note: If “>>>” soft Key is pressed on the above

the following soft keys appear. Pressing Eu-s/Eu-l soft key shifts characters buppercase and lowercase.

PhonebookLocal Sys Cnl

Local PhonebookCnlAddSrch

632

Add name:

>>>OKClr→NEC

<<< -Eu-s Cnl

(Lower-case character)

Page 180: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

To SThe Phon

played,istered

“Local

is en-key. (If ge “En-

Not

Not

Not

screen,

oretween

172

P 5: Enter the telephone number by using digit keys and press or OK soft key.

P 6: “NEC” and its telephone number has been added into Local Phonebook. Two seconds later, the display returns to Local Phonebook screen.

earch For Nameprocedure shown below is available in Local ebook.

Example: To Find “NEC BNET”.

STEP 1: While Local Phonebook screen is dispress Srch soft key. (If no data is regin Local Phonebook, the messagephone book empty” appears.)

STEP 2: Name Entry screen appears.

STEP 3: Enter a name (in this example, “NEC”tered) and then press or OK soft no appropriate data exists, the messatry not found!” appears.)

e: To delete an entered character, press or Clrsoft key.

e: To move the cursor one space to the right, press key or “→” soft key once

e: To delete an entered digit, press or Clr softkey.

<<< -Eu-l Cnl

(Upper-case character)

Number:Name: NEC

CnlOKClr

Entry added!Note: If “>>>” soft Key is pressed on the above

the following soft keys appear. Pressing Eu-s/Eu-l soft key shifts characters buppercase and lowercase.

Local PhonebookCnlAddSrch

Name:

>>>OKClr→

Name:

>>>OKClr→NEC

Page 181: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

Not

Not

creen gits le limit ed at a ds the to me/

173

P 4: A result of the search is displayed. Press or UP/DOWN soft key to scroll the result.

P 5: When “NEC BNET” appears, press , or OK soft key.

P 6: The registered data for “NEC BNET” ap-pears.From this screen, you can make a call by go-ing off-hook or pressing key.

e: To delete an entered character, press or Clrsoft key.

e: To move the cursor one space to the right, press key or “→” soft key once

<<< -Eu-s Cnl(Lower-case character)

<<< -Eu-l Cnl(Upper-case character)

Name: NEC

CnlOKDOWNNEC ABIKOUP

NEC BNETCnlOK

Name: NEC

DOWNUP

Speaker

Note:

More soft key appears in Phonebook data swhen the number of characters (name) or di(telephone number) are exceeding displayab(Up to 17 characters or digits can be displaytime). If the name or telephone number exceedisplayable limit, press or More soft keydisplay the last 17 characters/digits of the natelephone number.

Pref CnlNumber: XXXXXXXXName: NEC BNET

>>>More

Page 182: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To E

ExamTo MNum

STE

STE

STE

STE

e mod-K soft

ears.

screen,

oretween

or Clr

t, press

174

dit An Entry

ple: odify Name “Home” to “House” and Telephone ber “0123456789” to “0123456712”.

P 1: Press >>> soft key while the target Phone-book data is displayed.

P 2: Press EDIT soft key.

P 3: The following name edit screen appears.

P 4: Press or Clr soft key two times to erase “me”.

STEP 5: Enter “use” by using digit keys. After thification has completed, press or Okey.

Press key twice to enter “u”.Press key four times to enter “s“.Press key twice to enter “e“.

STEP 6: The following number edit screen app

Pref CnlNumber: 0123456789Name: Home

>>>More

EDIT DELNumber: 0123456789Name: Home

<<<

Edit Name:

>>>OKClr→Home

Edit Name:

>>>OKClr→Ho

Note: If “>>>” soft Key is pressed on the above

the following soft keys appear. Pressing Eu-s/Eu-l soft key shifts characters buppercase and lowercase.

Note: To delete an entered character, press soft key.

Note: To move the cursor one space to the righ key or “→” soft key once.

873

Edit Name:

>>>OKClr→House

<<< -Eu-s Cnl

(Lower-case character)

<<< -Eu-l Cnl

(Upper-case character)

Number: 0123456789 Cnl

Name: House

Clr OK

Page 183: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

To D

STE

he cur-

o sec-e Entry

ral

ber

175

P 7: Press or Clr soft key twice to erase “89”.

P 8: Enter “12” by pressing digit keys and then press or OK soft key.

P 9: The data modification has completed. Two seconds later, the display returns to Local Phonebook screen.

elete A Record

P 1: Press >>> soft key while the target Phone-book data is displayed.

STEP 2: Press DEL soft key.

STEP 3: Press or OK soft key to delete trently displaying data.

STEP 4: The data deletion has completed. Twonds later, the display returns to Namscreen.

To Add A Prefix To Telephone NumbeThe procedure shown below is available in LocPhonebook.

Example: To add a prefix “0184” in front of telephone num“0123456789”

Number: 01234567 Cnl

Name: House

Clr OK

Number: 0123456712Name: House

Clr OK Cnl

Entry edited!

Pref CnlNumber: 0123456789Name: NEC ABIKO

>>>More

EDIT DELNumber: 0123456789Name: NEC ABIKO

<<<

Name: NEC ABIKO

OKDelete this entry?

Cnl

Entry deleted!

Page 184: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

STE

Not

screen digits ble limit yed at a eeds the ey to ame/

176

P 1: Press Pref Soft Key while the target Phone-book data is displayed.

P 2: Enter a prefix (In this example, “0184” is en-tered) by using digit keys and press or

OK Soft Key.

P 3: The prefix is added in front of the telephonenumber. Once the prefix is added, Pref SoftKey will disappear.

e: To delete an entered digit, press or Clr softkey.

Pref CnlNumber: 0123456789Name: Takahashi

>>>More

ClrNumber: 0184Prefix Number Input

CnlOK

CnlNumber: 01840123456789Name: Takahashi

More

Note: More soft key appears in Phonebook datawhen the number of characters (name) or (telephone number) are exceeding displaya(Up to 17 characters or digits can be displatime). If the name or telephone number excdisplayable limit, press or More soft kdisplay the last 17 characters/digits of the ntelephone number.

Page 185: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

AvaThe Phon

SP: B

DigiCod

Character

∗ #

∗ #

177

ilable Characters In Local Phonebookfollowing tables show available characters in Local ebook.

UPPERCASE CHARACTER

lank Space

LOWERCASE CHARACTER

SP: Blank Space

t e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ∗ #

. A D G J M P T W SP ∗ #, B E H K N Q U X 0: C F I L O R V Y! À È Ì 5 Ñ S Ù Z

? Á É Í Ò β Ú 9

- Â Ê Î Ó 7 Û+ Ã Ë Ï Ô Ü% Ä 3 4 Õ 8

& Å Ö/ Æ Œ( Ç Ø) 2 6=

¿¡1

Digit Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Character

. a d g j m p t w SP, b e h k n q u x 0: c f i l o r v y! à è ì 5 ñ s ù z

? á é í ò β ú 9

: â ê î ó 7 û\ ä ë ï ô ü“ å 3 4 õ 8

@ æ ö1 ç 6

2

Page 186: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

CA

TherhandOn thmemOPE

The the CThis exceof ocup tonam

To VSTE

- OR

STE

oft key.

call is

desired

Not

e Menu

be dis-

swered

178

LL HISTORY

e are two types of Call History features. On the one , the history data is stored in the system memory. e other hand, the history data is stored in the ory of the telephone (see 7.CALL HISTORY RATION).

following describes the operating procedures for all History feature which controlled by the system.Call History feature can store up to 20 records. If eding 20 records, a record will be deleted in order currence. Also, this Call History feature can store 32 digits of dial number and 16 characters of

e information per record.

iew Call HistoryP 1: Press iCall soft key of Call History Feature

key while the current time is displayed onLCD.

-

P 1: Press key to display the Menu screen.On the Menu screen, select History (forDT730 Series)/ Call History (for DT330

Series) and then press or OK s(or press key.)

STEP 2: The history data of the last receiveddisplayed.

STEP 3: Press or ↑/↓ soft key to display a history data.

e: When the system administrator invalidates the Phonebook, this feature cannot be used. For details contact the system administrator.

DT730/710 DT330/310

5:25 PM MON 12 JUL 2010iCall MIC DND

Menu

11

Note: This feature cannot be activated from thkey on DT710 Series (ITL-6DE-1).

Note: If no history data is saved, "NO LIST" willplayed on LCD.

Note: Call History will display “!!” for an unanincoming call.

1

Back OK

12

Tool3DirectoryHistory

Pbook31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>

Pbook51500

12:55 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>!!

Page 187: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To MSTE

STE

To MSTE

STE

STE

mation,

make ar.

Not

be set

cluding

or Clr

screen igits ble limit yed at a eds the y to ame/

179

ake A Call From Call HistoryP 1: Display the history data of the target party.

P 2: Go off-hook or press key to make acall to the displayed party.

ake A Call With PrefixP 1: Press >>> soft key while the history data to

which you want to add a prefix.

P 2: Press Pref soft key.

P 3: Enter a prefix by using the digit keys. In thisexample, “012345” is entered. After enteringthe prefix, press or OK soft key.

STEP 4: If the call history data has name inforthe name is displayed as follows:

STEP 5: Go off-hook or press key to call to the displayed telephone numbe

e: While the history data is displayed, you cannotmake a call by dialing a telephone number.

Pbook51500

12:55 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>

Speaker

Pbook31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>

DEL31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

ENDPref<<<

Note: A maximum of 10 digits (0-9, * and #) canas a prefix.

Note: When prefix is added, up to 32 digits inthe prefix can be sent as dial number.

Note: To delete an entered character, press soft key.

Note: More soft key appears in Phonebook data when the number of characters (name) or d(telephone number) are exceeding displaya(Up to 17 characters or digits can be displatime). If the name or telephone number excedisplayable limit, press or More soft kedisplay the last 17 characters/digits of the ntelephone number.

OKNumber:Prefix Number Input

CnlClr

More

Name

CnlNumber

:NEC ABIKO:01234531300

Speaker

Page 188: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

To DSTE

STE

To APho

STE

OK soft

red.)

Not

Not

registerords at below to the

history,

screen,

oretween

180

elete A Specific DataP 1: Press >>> soft key while the history data

which you want to delete is displayed.

P 2: Press DEL soft key.

dd Call History Data To Local nebook

P 1: Press Pbook soft key or Phonebook Featurekey while the history data of the target party.

STEP 2: Enter a desired name and then press key.(In this example, “NEC ABIKO” is ente

e: If you want to exit Call History, press END softkey.

e: The Call History data stored on the system canbe added to Phonebook (controlled by the sys-tem) only. The data cannot be added to the Per-sonal Directory (described in 6.DIRECTORYOPERATION) controlled by the telephone.

Pbook31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>

DEL31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

ENDPref<<<

Pbook31300

1:03 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

>>>

Note: Local Phonebook feature allows you to up to 100 records. If exceeding 100 recthis point, the error message shownappears. Press OK soft key to go backabove display.

Note: If name information is stored on the call the name is displayed.

Note: If “>>>” soft Key is pressed on the above

the following soft keys appear. Pressing Eu-s/Eu-l soft key shifts characters buppercase and lowercase.

Entry NG (over)OK

Clr

Add name:

OK >>>NEC ABIKO

<<< -Eu-s Cnl

(Lower-case character)

<<< -Eu-l Cnl

(Upper-case character)

Page 189: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

181

P 3: The telephone number stored on the call his-tory is displayed. The telephone number canbe changed if necessary. Press OK soft keyto add the displayed data to Local Phone-book.

Clr

Name

OK CnlNumber

:NEC ABIKO:31300

Page 190: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

182

This page is for your notes.

Page 191: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

6This of DTyou c

Persentriview500

••••••••

TO

STE

ons.ss ,

ons.ss ,

Not

Series/DT310ure.

ed, thise, skip

.0.0.0,

183

. DIRECTORY OPERATION

chapter explains about Personal Directory function730 Series. By using Personal Directory function,an make a call with simple operation.

onal Directory function can register up to 500es (4 telephone numbers per entry). You can add//edit/delete these entries. If the directory containsentries (maximum), entries can be removed using

TO ADD NEW DATATO CHANGE GROUP NAMETO FIND A REGISTERED DATATO MAKE A CALL FROM DIRECTORYTO ADD PREFIX TO NUMBERTO EDIT DIRECTORY DATATO DELETE ALL DATATO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

ADD NEW DATA

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.OR

Press (Directory) key. The Directory screen shown at STEP 3 can be directly displayed.

STEP 2: Select Personal.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Edit.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: A maximum of 500 entries can be registered inDirectory.

DT730

Menu

Note: Directory feature is available for DT730and ITL-8LDE-1 only. DT710/DT330Series does not support the directory feat

Note: When using Phonebook feature is disablscreen will not be displayed. In that casthis step.

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

3 CorporateSystem

OKMenu↓

Personal

2

2

Page 192: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

tory.g the

en. Se-

ons.ss ,

Not

name.e HOW

184

P 4: Select Name.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Enter a name to be registered in direcEnter a name by using digits keys. After enterinname, press or OK soft key.

STEP 6: The display goes back to the Edit screlect Group.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

e: If the Personal/Terminal directory contains 500entries, the following screen appears.

To go back to the Directory screen, press orOK, and delete some entries from Search.

Search12

Group Setting

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKBack↓

Directory is full.[Edit]

OK

1

1

1Note: Up to 32 characters can be entered as a

For details on character entry method, seTO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4.

[Edit]

Name12

[Edit]

345

Name

OKBack

67890Save

Gr GroupTel #1

Company NameRing Tone

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

Illumination0No

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

2

Page 193: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE ons.ss ,

om theee TO

185

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 7: Select a desired group.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or OK soft

key.In this example, Colleagues is selected.

STEP 8: Select Tel #1.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

2

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Tel #1

Company NameRing Tone

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

Illumination0

Group

0 9

2

Note: Each group name can be changed frGroup Setting screen. For details, sCHANGE GROUP NAME.

12

[Group Select]

3456

20

Colleagues

OKBack

Group 6

FamilyFriends

Default

VIPs

Group 20

:

3

3

Page 194: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Next soft

.s.

ss

r OK soft

186

P 9: Enter a telephone number to be registered indirectory.Enter a telephone number by using digits keys. After entering the telephone number, press or Next soft key.

P 10:Select a Category to which the entered tele-phone number belongs. Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or Next soft key.• Press - key, and then press or

key.In this example, Company is selected.

Selectable categories are as follows:

STEP 11:Select either Disable or EnableSelect an item by one of the following operation• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press o

key.

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Company NameRing Tone

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

Illumination0

ColleaguesTel #1

Input a Telephone number.

[Tel #1]

NextBackBK

1

Category ICON

Company

Mobile

Voice Mail

Home

Others

0 5

1

12

[Category]

345

Company

NextPrev

HomeOthers

MobileVoice Mail

1 2

1 2

Page 195: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

ter enter-key.

Not

Not

a com-r entryERS.

187

A maximum of four telephone numbers can be set to an entry. If Enable is selected here, the tele-phone number which is being edited will be given top priority. In that case, the telephone number is automatically selected when you make a call with-out specifying a specific telephone number.

P 12:The display goes back to the Edit screenagain. Select Company Name.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 13:Enter a company name.Enter a company name by using digits keys. Afing the company name, press or OK soft

e: A maximum of four telephone numbers can beset to an entry. If two or more telephone numbersare required to be set, set the remaining tele-phone numbers to Tel #2 - Tel #4.

e: If multiple telephone numbers are registered toan entry and Priority Flag is disabled to all of thetelephone numbers, the telephone number set toTel #1 is automatically set as first priority number.

2

[Priority Flag]

OKPrev

112 Enable

Disable

7

7

Note: Up to 32 characters can be entered as pany name. For details on charactemethod, see HOW TO INPUT CHARACT

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Ring Tone

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

Illumination0

Colleagues

Company Name

31300

Input a Company name.[Company Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Page 196: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

en. Se-

ons.ss ,

to theer Toned “Tele-“Name”“Group”

ge the r “Tele-atic is

d.

O SET

188

P 14:The display goes back to the Edit screen. Se-lect Ring Tone.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 15:Select a desired Ringing Tone.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or OK soft

key.

STEP 16:The display goes back to the Edit screlect Illumination.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

8

8

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

Illumination0

Colleagues31300

Ring ToneNEC

0 9

Note: You can set ringer tone for calls routedspecified name (calling party) here. Ringtype can be set for “Name”, “Group” anphone set”. The ringer Tone type set for has higher priority than the types set for and “Terminal set”.

Note: Set 2 Default when you don’t want to chanringer tone here. The setting for “Group” ophone set” is applied. Also, when 1 Automset, 3 Tone Type 1 is automatically applie

Note: For details on each ringer tone type, see TRINGER TONE.

12

[Ring Tone]

3

16171819

Automatic

OKBack

Download 1Tone Type 14

DefaultTone Type 1

Download 3Download 2

:

9

9

Page 197: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

189

P 17:Select a desired color of the Call Indicationlamp.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press - key ( - key for ITL-8LDE-1).

• For DT730 Series

• For ITL-8LDE-1

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

0

Colleagues31300

NEC

IlluminationAutomatic

0 9 0 7

12

[Illumination]

345678

Automatic

OKBack

Yellow

RedGreen

White9

10

DefaultDisable

BlueLight BluePurple

11 Rotation↓

12

[Illumination]

34567

Automatic

OKBack

Orange

RedGreen

DefaultDisable

Rotation

Page 198: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

reen ofdesired

fter soft

e Editthe as-

umber:K soft

rectory

Not

Not

Not

e” will entry.

ill over-pear. Ifs Back, press

190

P 18:The display goes back to the Edit screen.Check the memory number assigned to thedirectory data being edited.

P 19:If you need to assign a memory number man-

ually, select Memory ID on the scthe previous step, and then enter a memory number (0 - 499).

Enter a memory number by using digits keys. Aentering the memory number, press or OKkey.

STEP 20:When the display goes back to thscreen, press Save soft key to save signed data.

STEP 21:“The data is registered at memory nXX” is displayed. Press key or Okey. The display returns to the Discreen.

e: You can set illumination type for calls routed tothe specified name (calling party) here. Illumina-tion type can be set for “Name”, “Group” and“Telephone set”. The illumination type set for“Name” has higher priority than the types set for“Group” and “Terminal set”.

e: Set 2 Default when you don’t want to change the illumination type here. The setting for “Group” or “Telephone set” is applied. Also, when 1 Auto-matic is set, 4 Red is automatically applied.

e: A memory number is automatically set in ascend-ing numeric order.

12

[Edit]

345

OKBack

67890Save

Gr

No

Ken Kobus

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

0

Colleagues31300

NECAutomaticAutomatic

Note: If Name is not entered, “No Input Namappear. Name information is required for a

Note: If a duplicate Memory ID is entered, “It wwrite a data at memory number:XX” will apyou do not overwrite the Memory ID, pressoft key. If you overwrite the Memory ID

or OK soft key.

0

Input a memory number.[Memory ID]

OKBackBK

1

0-499

Page 199: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

entering

Not

191

CHANGE GROUP NAME

P 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADDNEW DATA).

P 2: On the Directory screen, select GroupSetting.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select a group name to be changed.In this example, Default is selected.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press or OK soft key.

STEP 4: Select Name.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Enter a new group name.

Enter a group name by using digits keys. After the group name, press or OK soft key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

3

3

Search12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

1

1

12

[Group]

3456

20

Default

OKBack

Group 6

FamilyFriends

ColleaguesVIPs

:Group 20

1

1

12

[Group Setting]

3Ring Tone

OKBack↓Illumination

Name

Page 200: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

Not

192

P 6: Display returns to the Group screen. Makesure that the new group name takes effect.

e: Up to 32 characters can be entered as a group-name. For details on character entry method, seeHOW TO INPUT CHARACTERS in chapter 4.

e: You can set ringer tone (→ select 2 Ring Tone)and illumination types (→ select 3 Illumination)for calls routed to the specified group here. Ringer tone and illumination types can be set for“Name”, “Group” and “Telephone set”. The ringertone and illumination types set for “Name” havehigher priority than the types set for Group andTelephone set. Also, the ringer tone and illumina-tion types for Group have higher priority than thetypes set for Terminal set.

Input a group name.

[Group Name Set]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Default

Page 201: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

• TSTE

STE

STE

ons.ss

ft key.

.

reen, by re tele-

Not

DT7

193

FIND A REGISTERED DATA

o Search by Group NameP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search on the Directory screen.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Group.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select a target group.In this example, Colleagues is selected.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press or OK so

STEP 5: Select a target name by pressing

In the following Directory (Name List) scyou can make a call to the selected party pressing or Call soft key. If two or mo

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

30

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

1

1

12

[Search]

34 Others

Name

OKBack↓

Tel Number

Group

2

2

12

[Group]

3456

20

Colleagues

OKBack

Group 6

FamilyFriends

Default

VIPs

Group 20

:

Page 202: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

Not

194

phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

P 6: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can make a call to the selected number by pressing

or Call soft key.

e: If no entry is set to the selected group, "No data"is issued.

e: If two or more telephone numbers are assignedto an entry, a top priority telephone number isautomatically selected when the Detail screenappears.

John Smith

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetailKen KobusJulia

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

Ken Kobus

0800XXXXXX31300

Page 203: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

STE

STE

STE

soft

Notse andsystemd "kenaracterdminis-

search-

nd, you

entered

a com-r entryERS.

195

o Search by Name

P 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADDNEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Name.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Enter a target name. After entering the name, Press or OKkey.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

2

2

Note: A distinction is made between upper calower case characters, according as the settings. For example, "Ken Kobus" ankobus" are distinguished as different chstrings. For details, contact the System Atorator.

Note: A blank space is also distinguished while ing database for a name.

Note: Even if the name is not entered to the ecan search for a name.

Note: If there is no entry corresponding to the name, "No data" is issued.

Note: Up to 32 characters can be entered as pany name. For details on charactemethod, see HOW TO INPUT CHARACT

12

[Search]

34 Others

OKBack↓

Tel Number

GroupName

Input a name.[Name]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Page 204: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

196

P 5: Select a target name by pressing (Up/

down-cursor).In the following Directory (Name List) screen, you can make a call to the selected party by pressing or Call soft key. If two or more tele-phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

P 6: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can make a call to the selected number by pressing or Call soft key.

e: If two or more telephone numbers are assignedto an entry, a top priority telephone number isautomatically selected when the Detail screenappears.

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe Ichiro

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 205: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TSTE

STE

STE

K soft

.reen, by re tele-a top

Not ered toumber.

197

o Search by Telephone NumberP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Tel Number.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Enter a target telephone number. After entering the number, press or Okey.

STEP 5: Select a target name by pressing In the following Directory (Name List) scyou can make a call to the selected party pressing or Call soft key. If two or mophone numbers are assigned to an entry, priority telephone number will be dialed.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

3

3

Note: Even if the telephone number is not entthe end, you can search for a telephone n

12

[Search]

34 Others

OKBack↓

Tel Number

GroupName

Input a Telephone number.

[Tel Number]

OKBackBK

1

Page 206: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

Not

198

P 6: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can make a call to the selected number by pressing or Call soft key.

e: If there is no entry corresponding to the enterednumber, "No data" is issued on the screen.

e: If two or more telephone numbers are assignedto an entry, a top priority telephone number isautomatically selected when the Detail screenappears.

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe Ichiro

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 207: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TSTE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

or

ed, with r clos-

Not

199

o Search by Memory IDP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Others.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Memory ID.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Enter a memory number (0-499). After entering the memory number, press OK soft key.

The list of memory numbers will be displaythe entered memory number or the numbeest to the entered number in front.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

4

4

12

[Search]

34

OKBack

Tel Number

GroupName

Others

1

1

12

[Others]

34

OKBackAlphabet

CategoryCompany

Memory ID

Page 208: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

ke a call r Call

Not

Not

200

P 6: Select a target name by pressing (Up/

down-cursor).In the following Directory (Name List) screen, you can make a call to the selected party by pressing or Call soft key. If two or more tele-phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

P 7: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can mato the selected number by pressing osoft key.

e: If no data exists in Directory, "No data" is issuedon the screen.

e: If two or more telephone numbers are assignedto an entry, a top priority telephone number isautomatically selected when the Detail screenappears.

Input a Memory number.[Memory ID]

OKBackBK

1

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 209: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TSTE

STE

STE

s.ss ,

s.ss

ft key.

Not

201

o Search by CategoryP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Others.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Category.Select an item by one of the following operation• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select a desired category.In this example, Company is selected.Select an item by one of the following operation• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press or OK so

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

4

4

12

[Search]

34

OKBack

Tel Number

GroupName

Others

2

2

12

[Others]

34

OKBackAlphabetCompany

Memory ID

Category

1

1

Page 210: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

ke a call r Call

Not

ssignedmber isscreen

202

P 6: Select a target name by pressing .In the following Directory (Name List) screen, you can make a call to the selected party by pressing or Call soft key. If two or more tele-phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

P 7: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can mato the selected number by pressing osoft key.

e: If there is no entry corresponding to the selectedcategory, "No data" is issued on the screen.

12

[Category]

345

Company

OKBack

HomeEtc

MobileVoice Mail

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

Abe Taro

Note: If two or more telephone numbers are ato an entry, a top priority telephone nuautomatically selected when the Detail appears.

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 211: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TSTE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

key.

Not

203

o Search by Company NameP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Others.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Company.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Enter a company name.After entering the name, Press or OK soft

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

4

4

12

[Search]

34

OKBack

Tel Number

GroupName

Others

3

3

12

[Others]

34

OKBackAlphabetCompany

Memory ID

Category

Input a Company name.

[Company]

OKBackOptionBK

A

Page 212: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

ke a call r Call

Not

Not

Not

Not

Not

ssignedmber isscreen

204

P 6: Select a target name by pressing .In the following Directory (Name List) screen, you can make a call to the selected party by pressing or Call soft key. If two or more tele-phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

P 7: To display the detailed data for a specificname, press Detail soft key while the name ishighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can mato the selected number by pressing osoft key.

e: A distinction is made between upper case andlower case characters. For example, "KenKobus" and "ken kobus" are distinguished as dif-ferent character strings.

e: A blank space is also distinguished while search-ing database for a name.

e: Even if the name is not entered to the end, youcan search for a name.

e: Up to 32 characters can be entered as a com-pany name. For details on character entrymethod, see HOW TO INPUT CHARACTERS.

e: If there is no entry corresponding to the selectedCompany, "No data" is issued on the screen.

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

Abe Taro

Note: If two or more telephone numbers are ato an entry, a top priority telephone nuautomatically selected when the Detail appears.

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 213: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• TSTE

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

.

s.ss

ft key.

Not

205

o Search by AlphabetP 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Search.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Select Others.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select Alphabet.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 5: Select a desired group of alphabetsIn this example, ABC is selected.Select an item by one of the following operation• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press or OK so

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

1

1

12

[Directory]

340

Own NumberDelete All

Edit

OKMenu↓

Group Setting

Search

4

4

12

[Search]

34

OKBack

Tel Number

GroupName

Others

4

4

12

[Others]

34

OKBack

Company

Memory IDCategory

Alphabet

1

0

Page 214: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

specificame is

ke a call r Call

Not

roup ofen.

ssignedmber isscreen

206

P 6: Select a target name by pressing .In the following Directory (Name List) screen, you can make a call to the selected party by pressing or Call soft key. If two or more tele-phone numbers are assigned to an entry, a top priority telephone number will be dialed.

STEP 7: To display the detailed data for a name, press Detail soft key while the nhighlighted.

In the following Detail screen, you can mato the selected number by pressing osoft key.

e: Select * Others to find names which begin with acharacter other than alphabet such as numericsor symbols.

12

[Alphabet]

345678

OKBack

PQRS

JKLMND

All*#

DEFGHI

TUVWXYZOthers

ABC

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe SabroAbe Kentaro

Abe Taro

Note: If there is no entry corresponding to the galphabets, "No data" is issued on the scre

Note: If two or more telephone numbers are ato an entry, a top priority telephone nuautomatically selected when the Detail appears.

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 215: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

• T

STE

STE

t party).

d then

sing to make

Not

DT7red to aity tele-

ssignedmber isscreen

207

MAKE A CALL FROM DIRECTORY

o Make a Call from Name List Screen

P 1: Display the Directory (Name List) screen fora target party (see TO FIND A REGISTEREDDATA).

P 2: Select a target name and then make a call.Select a target name by pressing , and then press or Call soft key to make a call to the selected party.

• To Make a Call from Detail Screen

STEP 1: Display the Detail screen for a targe(see TO FIND A REGISTERED DATA

STEP 2: Select a target telephone number anmake a call.Select a target telephone number by pres

, and then press or Call soft key a call to the selected number.

e: While Directory screen is being displayed, youcannot make a call by dialing a telephone num-ber.

30

Abe Jiro

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe Ichiro

Abe Kentaro

Abe Jiro

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe Ichiro

Abe Kentaro

Note: If multiple telephone numbers are registetarget party, a call is made to the first priorphone number.

Note: If two or more telephone numbers are ato an entry, a top priority telephone nuautomatically selected when the Detail appears.

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

0800XXXXXX31300

Abe Kentaro

Page 216: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

to tele-d to be

etting.

ons.ss ,

ons.ss ,

.0.0.0,

30

208

TO ADD PREFIX TO NUMBER

• To Set PrefixWhen making a call, a prefix can be addedphone numbers to be dialed. Prefixes neeset in advance.

STEP 1: Display the Menu screen, and select S

STEP 2: Select User Setting.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select Talk.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

12

[Detail]

34567890

Gr

NoCallBack

Tel #4Tel #3

Colleagues

NECAutomaticAutomatic

Abe Kentaro

0800XXXXXXXX31300

↓ 0

Note: For the firmware version earlier than 5Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT7

1

1

12

[Setting]

3OKMenu

Data Backup/RestoreDownloadUser Setting

2

2

Page 217: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

soft

reen at set, re-, select

be set

cluding

209

P 4: Select Prefix.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 5: Select Prefix 1.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 6: Enter a prefix by using the digit keys. After entering the prefix, press or OKkey.

STEP 7: The display goes back the Prefix scSTEP 5. If multiple prefixes need to bepeat STEP 6 and STEP 7. In that case

Prefix 2 and Prefix 3.

Incoming Call12

Display

[Incoming Call]

345670

Change Password

Peripherals

Config

OKBack↓

Security

Talk

Usability

5

5

RTP Alarm12

Key Touch Tone

[Talk]

345

Hold Music

OKBack

DTMF Tone

Prefix

1

1

Note: A maximum of 10 digits (0-9, * and #) canas a prefix.

Note: When prefix is added, up to 32 digits inthe prefix can be sent as dial number.

12

[Prefix]

3OKBack

Prefix 3Prefix 2Prefix 1

Input a prefix number.[Prefix 1]

OKBackBK

1

2 3

Page 218: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

STE

STE

STE

. Selectt key to

Not

Not

210

o Add Prefix When Making A Call

P 1: Display the Name List screen for a targetparty (see TO FIND A REGISTERED DATA).

P 2: Select a target name and display Sub Menu.Select a target name by pressing , and then press HELP key or Option soft key.

P 3: Select Prefix.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key.

STEP 4: Predetermined prefixes are displayeda prefix and then press or OK sofmake a call.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

e: If multiple telephone numbers are registered to atarget party, a call is made to the first priority tele-phone number.

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe KentaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetailAbe KentaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

1

1

12

SubMenu

3

OKCancel

Delete AllDelete OnePrefix

4 Edit

12

[Prefix]

3CallBack↓

187186184

Page 219: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOSTE

STE

STE

for thee nec-W DA-

ess

Not

211

EDIT DIRECTORY DATA P 1: Display the Name List screen for a target

party (see TO FIND A REGISTERED DATA).

P 2: Select a target name and display Sub Menu.Select a target name by pressing , and then press HELP key or Option soft key.

P 3: Select Edit.Select an item by one of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key.

STEP 4: On the Edit screen, the detailed dataselected name is displayed. Modify thessary data by referring to TO ADD NETA. After the data modification is complete, prSave soft key on the Edit screen.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

DT730

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe KentaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe KentaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

4

4

12

SubMenu

3

OKCancel

Delete AllDelete OnePrefix

4 Edit

12

[Edit]

34567890

Gr

NoOKBack

Tel #4Tel #3

0Save

31300

NECAutomaticAutomatic

Abe Kentaro

0800XXXXXX

Colleagues

Page 220: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOSTE

STE

STE

the dis-

Not

r Back

212

DELETE ALL DATA P 1: Open the Directory screen (see TO ADD

NEW DATA).

P 2: Select Delete All.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: Press or OK soft key to delete all the da-ta.

STEP 4: After all the directory data is deleted, play changes as follows:

STEP 5: Press or OK soft key.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

0

0

12

[Directory]

340

Own Number

Edit

OKMenu

↓Group Setting

Search

Delete All

Delete All Directory?

[Directory]

OKBack

Note: To cancel the data deletion, press osoft key.

Deleted.[Directory]

OK

Page 221: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

ppears. appro-

Not

Cancel

213

DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

P 1: Display the Name List screen for a targetparty (see TO FIND A REGISTERED DATA).

P 2: Select a name to be deleted and display SubMenu.

Select a target name by pressing , and then press HELP key or Option soft key.

P 3: Select Delete One.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key

STEP 4: The following confirmation message aPress or OK soft key to delete thepriate directory data.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

DT730

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetail

Abe ShintaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

[Directory]

CallBackOptionDetailAbe ShintaroAbe JiroAbe Ichiro

2

2

Note: To cancel the data deletion, press or soft key.

12

SubMenu

3

OKCancel

Delete All

Prefix

4 Edit

Delete One

Delete this entry?

[Directory]

OKBack

Page 222: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

214

P 5: After the appropriate directory data is delet-ed, the display changes as follows:

P 6: Press or OK soft key.

Deleted.[Directory]

OK

Page 223: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

7This simpleoper

Call Series)into i

••••••

••••

Not

215

. CALL HISTORY OPERATIONchapter explains the Call History feature of DT Series. By using Call History, you can make a call withation.

History feature allows the telephone to register up to 50 records (for DT730 Series)/10 records (for DT330ts memory. If exceeding 50 records/10 records, a record will be deleted in order of occurrence.

FOR DT730 SERIES

TO VIEW CALL HISTORYTO MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HISTORYTO ADD CALL HISTORY DATA TO DIRECTORYTO EDIT DIRECTORY DATA FROM CALL HISTORYTO DELETE ALL DATATO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

FOR DT330 SERIES

TO VIEW CALL HISTORYTO MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HISTORYTO DELETE ALL DATATO DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

e: Register call history data to Personal Directory asnecessary. Call History data will be cleared whenpowering off the telephone. However, call historydata can be backed up to your PC. About Backup/Restore, see “TO BACKUP PERSONAL SET-TINGS” or “TO RESTORE PERSONAL SET-TINGS” in “3.TERMINAL SETUP”.

Page 224: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Not

216

e: The call history data that is stored in the memoryof each telephone cannot be added to Phonebook(both System Phonebook and Local Phonebook)controlled by the system.

Page 225: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

7.1

TO

STE

STE

STE

/↓ soft

Mis

Ou

Inc

Not

be dis-

ephoneirectory, as call

be dis-

ss

217

FOR DT730 SERIES

VIEW CALL HISTORY

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select History.

P 2: Select a kind of calls. In this example, Incoming is selected.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: The history data of the last received call is displayed.

If two or more records exist, use or ↑key to display the next/former records.

Item Description

sed Display the history of unanswered incoming calls.

tgoing Display the history of outgoing calls.

oming Display the history of answered and unanswered incoming calls.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

DT730

3

3

12

[History]

34 Delete All

Outgoing

OKMenu↓

Missed

Incoming

Note: For unanswered incoming calls, willplayed on the left of the name.

Note: If you make/answer a call to/from the telnumber which is registered to Personal Dthe corresponding name will be displayedhistory data.

Note: If there is no history data, "No data" willplayed on LCD.

Note: To go back to former menu (STEP 3), preor Back soft key.

1

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 10:00Ken Kobus

7205

Page 226: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOTO

(CASSTE

STE

(CASSTE

or Op-ub

g ,

Not

he firm-

218

MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HIS-RY

E 1)P 1: Display call history data of a target telephone

number (see TO VIEW CALL HISTORY).

The following is an example when a history data ofIncoming Calls is displayed.

P 2: Press key to make a call to the telephone number.

E 2)P 1: Display call history data of a target telephone

number (see TO VIEW CALL HISTORY).

The following is an example when a history data ofIncoming Calls is displayed.

STEP 2: On the above screen, press HELP keytion soft key to display the following SMenu.

STEP 3: To make a call, select Call (by usinor pressing key) and then press or OK soft key.

e: While the history data is displayed, you cannotmake a call by dialing a telephone number.

DT730

2

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 9:58Abe Kentaro

7207

Note: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for tware version before 5.0.0.0.

2

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 9:58Abe KentaroTel: 7207

12

SubMenu

3

OKBack

PrefixDirectory AddCall

4 Delete One5 Delete All

11

Page 227: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Not

219

e: When making a call from Call History, a prefixcan be added to the dial number. In that case,select 3 Prefix on the SubMenu (indicated atSTEP 2 of CASE 2) to display the Prefix screen.On the Prefix screen, choose a prefix to beadded to the dial number. Also, prefixes need tobe set in advance. For details on setting of prefix,see TO ADD PREFIX TO NUMBER in Chapter 6Directory Operation.

Page 228: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO DIR

STEP

STEP

ns.s ,

ns.s

oft key.

Note

220

ADD CALL HISTORY DATA TO ECTORY

1: Display call history data of a target telephonenumber (see TO VIEW CALL HISTORY).

The following is an example when history data ofan Incoming Call is displayed.

Press HELP key or Option soft key whiledisplaying the call history data for the targettelephone number.

2: The following Sub Menu is displayed. Select Directory Add.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key

STEP 3: Select New.Select an item by either of the following operatio• Highlight an item by using , and then pres

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select a category.In this example, Company is selected.Select an item by either of the following operatio• Highlight an item by using , and then pres

or Next soft key.• Press key, and then press or Next s

: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

DT730

1

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 11:0031312

31312

2

2

12

SubMenu

3

OKBack

Prefix

Call

4 Delete One5 Delete All

Directory Add

1

1

12

[Directory Edit]

Addition

OKBack↓

New

1

1

Page 229: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

. .

r 6 Di-ed datay.

in the be dis-

tored ins name

221

Selectable categories are as follows:

P 5: Select either Disable or Enable.A maximum of four telephone numbers can be set to an entry. If Enable is selected here, the tele-phone number which is being edited will be given top priority. In that case, the telephone number is automatically selected when you make a call with-out specifying a specific telephone number.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

STEP 6: The following Edit screen is displayed“31312” has been registered to Tel #1

See “TO ADD NEW DATA” in Chapterectory Operation, and register detail(such as name, group, etc) to directorCategory ICON

Company

Mobile

Voice Mail

Home

Others

12

[Category]

345

Company

NextBackOthersHome

MobileVoice Mail

1 2

2

1 2

Note: If the corresponding data is not storeddirectory, only the telephone number willplayed as Tel #1.

Note: If the corresponding data has already sthe directory, the detailed data (such agroup, etc.) is displayed.

12

[Priority Flag]

Disable

OKPrev

Enable

12

[Edit]

34567890

Gr

NoOKBack

Tel #4

Tel #2Tel #3

0Save

Group

Company Name

31312

Ring ToneIllumination

Name

Page 230: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOCA

STE

STE

ons.ss ,

for the

ons.ss ,

Not

222

EDIT DIRECTORY DATA FROM LL HISTORY

P 1: Display call history data of a target telephonenumber (see TO VIEW CALL HISTORY).

The following is an example when history data ofan Incoming Call is displayed.

Press HELP key or Option soft key whiledisplaying the call history data for the targettelephone number.

P 2: The following Sub Menu is displayed. Select Directory Add.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key

STEP 3: Select Addition.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 4: Select a search method.

See TO FIND A REGISTERED DATAprocedure of the searching method.

In this example, Group is selected.Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

DT730

1

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 10:007205

7205

2

2

12

SubMenu

3

OKBack

Prefix

Call

4 Delete One5 Delete All

Directory Add

2

2

12

[Directory Edit]

OKBack

NewAddition

1

1

Page 231: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

exam-

ons.ss

OK soft

ata" will

numbertered toXXXX”

223

P 5: Select a group. In this example, Colleagues is selected.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press OK soft key

P 6: The names belonging to Colleagues are dis-played as the following example.

Select a name and then press or OK softkey.

STEP 7: Select a registration destination. In thisple, “7205” will be added to Tel #2.

Select an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press - key, and then press or

key.

12

[Directory Search]

34

Group

OKBackOthers

NameTel Number

2

2

12

[Group]

3456

20

Colleagues

OKBack

Group 6

FamilyFriends

Default

VIPs

Group 20

:

Note: If there is no corresponding data, "No dbe displayed on LCD.

Note: In this example, a mobile telephone “0800XXXXXXX” has already been regisTel #1. If you select Tel #1 here, “0800XXXwill be overwritten with “7205”.

Kimura

[Directory]

OKBack

Abe Kentaro

Ken Kobus

1 4

12

[Directory]

34

Tel #1:

OKBackTel #4:

Tel #2:Tel #3:

0800XXXXXXX

Page 232: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STEP

STEP

of Di-Tel #2.pera-

224

8: Select a Category to which the telephone number belongs.In this example, Company is selected.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press or OK soft key.

9: Select either Disable or Enable.A maximum of four telephone numbers can be set to an entry. If Enable is selected here, the tele-phone number which is being edited will be given top priority. In that case, the telephone number is automatically selected when you make a call with-out specifying a specific telephone number.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press

or OK soft key.• Press or key, and then press or OK soft

key.

STEP 10:The display moves to the Edit screen rectory. “7205” has been registered to See TO EDIT DIRECTORY DATA in Directory Otion, and edit the data as necessary.

1

1

12

[Category]

345

Company

NextBackOthersHome

MobileVoice Mail

1 2

2

1 2

12

[Priority Flag]

Disable

OKPrev

Enable

12

[Edit]

34567890

Gr

NoOKBack

Tel #4

7205Tel #3

0Save

0800XXXXXXX

Ken KobusColleagues

NECAutomaticBlue

Page 233: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

play soft

Not

Not

225

DELETE ALL DATA

P 1: Display the Menu screen, and select History.

P 2: Select All Delete.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 3: The following confirmation message appears. Press or OK soft key to delete all the da-ta.

STEP 4: After all history data is deleted, the dischanges as follows. Press or OKkey.

e: For the firmware version earlier than 5.0.0.0,Back is displayed instead of Menu.

e: To cancel the data deletion, press or Backsoft key.

DT730

4

4

12

[History]

34

Outgoing

OKMenu↓

Incoming

Missed

Delete All

[Delete All]

Delete All Histories?

OKBack

[Delete History]

All History data has been deleted.

OK

Page 234: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

pears. appro-

Not

coming

r Back

226

DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

P 1: Display call history data of a target telephonenumber referring to TO VIEW CALL HISTO-RY. The following is an example when a history data of Incoming Calls is displayed.

Press HELP key or Option soft key whiledisplaying the call history data for the targettelephone number.

P 2: The following Sub Menu is displayed. Select Delete One.

Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key, and then press , or OK soft

key.

STEP 3: The following confirmation message apPress or OK soft key to delete thepriate history data.

e: Use Menu key instead of HELP key for the firm-ware version before 5.0.0.0.

DT730

1

[Incoming]

OptionBack↓

12/JUL/2010 (MON) 11:00Ken Kobus

31310

4

4

Note: By selecting 5 Delete All, all records of InCall can be deleted.

Note: To cancel the data deletion, press osoft key.

12

SubMenu

3

OKBack

Prefix

Call

45 Delete All

Directory Add

Delete One

[Incoming]

OKBack

Delete this entry?

Page 235: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

227

P 4: After the appropriate call history data is delet-ed, the display changes as follows. Press

or OK soft key.

OK

Deleted.[Incoming]

Page 236: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

7.2

TO

• TO

STE

STE

d. ons.ss , Not

calls. calls.

cate the ber of

s

228

FOR DT330 SERIES

VIEW CALL HISTORY

O VIEW DATA OF INCOMING CALL/UTGOING CALL

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open the Menu screen.

P 2: Select Call History.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Select a kind of calls. In this example, Incoming Calls is selecteSelect an item by either of the following operati• Highlight an item by using , and then pre

or OK soft key.• Press key.

e: This feature is DT730 Series and DT330 Series.The following are examples of LCD displays ofDT730 Series and DT330 Series.

DT330

Menu

DT330 Series

1 Call History 2 Directory

[Menu]

Back OK

1

1

Item DescriptionIncoming Calls To view the history of incomingOutgoing Calls To view the history of outgoing

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

SettingsDirectoryCall History

1

1

12

[Call History]

OKBackOutgoing Calls:Incoming Calls: 3

7

DelIndinumcall

Page 237: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

STE

Not

Not

Not

ey. Foritching

cannot

s Back

is not phoneyed on

229

P 4: The history data of the last received call is displayed. If name information of the caller exists, the name is displayed as follows:

P 5: To view the telephone number of the caller, press .

e: There are two types of incoming call: AnsweredCall and Missed Call. When history data ofmissed calls is displayed on the screen, appears on the top line of the screen.

e: If two or more records exist, use to displaythe next/former records (or pressing an appropri-ate digit key). For example, press “0” key to dis-play the tenth record.

e: If no history data is saved, "No data" will be dis-played on LCD.

[Incoming Calls]

OKBackDelKen Kobus

10. 12 JUL 13:17

[Incoming Calls]

OKBackDel0901234567810. 12 JUL 13:17

Note: To go back to name display, press kthe telephone without the cursor key, swbetween “name” and “telephone number”be performed.

Note: To go back to former menu (STEP 3), pressoft key.

Note: If the telephone number of the callerreceived (due to Caller ID blocking, publicor out of area, etc.), “Private” is displaLCD.

Page 238: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

• T

STE

STE

all is aller s:

Not

Not

to dis-ing an “0” key

s Back

is not phoneyed on

230

O VIEW DATA OF MISSED CALL ONLY

P 1: While indicating the current time on LCD,press key to open Shortcut screen.

P 2: Select Missed Calls.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: The history data of the last received cdisplayed. If name information of the cexists, the name is displayed as follow

e: indicate that the telephone has received amissed call.

indicate that the telephone has received avoice mail.

e: When voice mail service is not used, “ -----------” is displayed instead of “ Voice Mail”.

19:20 PM MON 12 JUL 2010

1

1

12

[Shortcut]

3OKBack

---------------------------Voice MailMissed Calls : 2

22

Note: If two or more records exist, use keyplay the next/former records (or pressappropriate digit key). For example, pressto display the tenth record.

Note: To go back to former menu (STEP 3), pressoft key.

Note: If the telephone number of the callerreceived (due to Caller ID blocking, publicor out of area, etc.), “Private” is displaLCD.

[Incoming Calls]

OKBackDel.Ken Kobus10. 12 JUL 13:17

Page 239: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOTO

STE

STE

Not

231

MAKE A CALL FROM CALL HIS-RY

P 1: Display the call history data of the target tele-phone number (see TO VIEW CALL HISTO-RY).

The following is an example when the history dataof an incoming call is displayed.

P 2: Press key while the history data for the target telephone number is displayed on LCD.

e: While the history data is displayed, you cannotmake a call by dialing a telephone number.

DT330

[Incoming Calls]

OKBackDelKen Kobus10. 12 JUL 13:17

Page 240: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

es as

the his-

Inc

Ou

r Back

232

DELETE ALL DATA

P 1: Select Call History on the Menu screen.Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

P 2: Select a kind of calls. In this example, Incoming Calls is selected. Select an item by either of the following operations.• Highlight an item by using , and then press ,

or OK soft key.• Press key.

STEP 3: Press Del soft key. The display changfollows:

STEP 4: Press or OK soft key to delete all tory data of selected call type.

Item Description

oming Calls To delete all the history data of incoming calls.

tgoing Calls To delete all the history data of outgoing calls.

DT330

1

1

12

[Menu]

3OKBack

SettingsDirectoryCall History

1

1

12

[Call History]

OKBackOutgoing Calls:Incoming Calls: 3

7

DelIndicate the number of calls

Note: To cancel the data deletion, press osoft key.

Delete All

Back

[Incoming Calls]

OK

Page 241: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TO

STE

STE

STE

Not

233

DELETE A SPECIFIC DATA

P 1: Display the call history data which you want todelete (see TO VIEW CALL HISTORY). Thefollowing is an example when the history dataof an incoming call is displayed.

P 2: Press Del soft key. The display changes as follows:

P 3: Press or OK soft key to delete the select-ed history data.

e: To cancel the data deletion, press or Backsoft key.

DT330

[Incoming Calls]

OKBackDelKen Kobus10. 12 JUL 13:17

Delete One

Back

[Incoming Calls]

OK

Page 242: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

234

This page is for your notes.

Page 243: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

8TECThe

E

Disp one

Disp -

Char -

Prog eys

Fixed Keys

Back

Soft one

Call

Hand uplex)

Head

Pow

Adap

Colo

Dime [mm]

Weig 0 kg

N

235

. SPECIFICATIONS

HNICAL SPECIFICATIONSfollowing shows the technical specifications of DT 300 Series.

Telephone Type 8LD 32D 24D/12D 6DE 2

lay (LCD) 87 × 43mm, 168 × 58 dot matrix, 28-digit 4-line* 8LD has two LCDs.

90 × 28mm, 24-digit × 3-line N

lay Color Monochrome (with no shades of gray)

acter on LCD Characters supported by Multilingual Display (Note 1)

rammable KeyKey data is displayed

on LCD.8LD : 32 (8 X 4) /

32/24/12 Keys [2-color (red and green) LED] 6 Keys [2-color (red and green) LED]

2 K

Feature Key 10 keys (with Menu/Cursor button) 12 Keys 12

light Display and Digit Key (lit for 10 seconds when operating)*For 32D/24D/12D, Display Backlight is optional. None

Key 4 Keys N

History Outgoing Call: 10 record, Incoming Call: 10 records None

s-free Standard equipment (Full-duplex) Standard equipment (Half-d

set Available Not available

er Consumption 2.2 [W] 1.2 [W]

ter (optional) Recording Unit (ADA)/Analog Port Unit (APR)/Wall-mounting kit (WM)/Digit-key Set Unit/Side panel Side panel

r Black/White Black

nsion (W×D×H) 179(W) × 248.7(D) × 111.7(H) [mm] 179(W) × 257(D) × 112(H)

ht 1.3 kg 1.2 kg 1.2 kg 1.1 kg 1.

ote 1: 6DE does not support the display in Russian.

Page 244: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

The

Te E

Disp ne

Disp -

Prog eys

Fixe eys

Back

Soft ne

Direc

Call

XML ne

Hand uplex)

Head

LAN

Voic 29a

IP A

QoS

VLA

Secu

Pow l)

Pow

Dow usic on

Adapounting itpanel

Colo

Dime

Weig kg

236

following shows the technical specifications of DT 700 Series.

lephone Type 8LD 32D 24D/12D 8LDE 6DE 2

lay (LCD) 87 × 43mm, 224 × 96 dot matrix, 28-digit 5-line* 8LD has two LCDs.

90 × 28mm, 168 × 41 dot matrix, No

lay Color Gray scale (with 8 shades of gray) Monochrome (with no shades of gray)

rammable KeyKey data is

displayed on LCD.8LD (32 (8 X 4)

Keys)

32/24/12 Keys [2-color (red and green) LED]

Key data is displayed on LCD.8LDE (8 Keys) [2-

color (red and green) LED]

6 Keys [2-color (red and green) LED] 2 K

d Feature Key 10 keys (with Menu/Cursor/Security button) 10 Keys 12 K

light Display and Digit Key (lit for 10 seconds when operating) None

Key 4 Keys No

tory 500 records None

History Outgoing Call: 50 record, Incoming Call: 50 records None

Browser Available No

s-free Standard equipment (Full-duplex), Wide-band Standard equipment (Full-d

set Available Not available

Interface 2-port, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, Full-duplex/Half-duplex, Auto Negotiation /Fixed

e CODEC G.711(µ-law, A-law), G.729a, G.722 G.711(µ-law, A-law), G.7

ddress Setting Sets via DHCP server/Sets Statically

ToS (IP Precedence, Diffserv)

N Tag VLAN (IEEE802.1Q/p)

rity IEEE802.1x authentication (EAP-MD5, EAPOL Forwarding), SIP&RTP Encryption

er Supply Center Power Supply = IEEE802.3af, Local Power Supply = AC adapter (AC-L UNIT/AC-2R UNIT: optiona

er Consumption PoE=6.24 [W]/Local=5.64 [W] PoE=3.264 [W]/Local=2.928 [W]

nload Program/Configuration data/Ringing Tone/Music on Hold/Directory data Program/Configuration data/MHold

ter (Optional) Recording Unit/Wall-mounting kit/Digit-key Set Unit/Side panelWall-mounting kit/Digit-key Set Unit/

Side panel

Wall-mk

/Side r Black/White Black

nsion (W×D×H) 179(W) × 264(D) × 112(H) [mm]

205.8(W) × 258(D)× 112(H) [mm]

179(W) × 258(D) × 112(H) [mm] 179(W) × 225(D) × 112(H) [mm]

ht 1.3 kg 1.3 kg 1.2 kg 1.1 kg 1.0

Page 245: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

9ME

237

. MENU LIST

NU LIST FOR DT730 SERIES

Menu Item Description

For firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later with a Home URL registered.

Menu Press to display the Menu screen.

History To view Call History data. Also, you can add the history data to the directory.

DirectoryTo access directory feature. There are the following three types of directoryfeatures: Personal Directory, Phonebook and Corporate Directory. Thischapter explains the menu list for Personal Directory feature.

Service To display XML application screen registered in the service URL.

Setting To access user settings.

Portal To display XML application screen registered in the home URL.

For firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later without a Home URL registered.

Menu Press to display the Menu screen.

History To view Call History data. Also, you can add the history data to the directory.

DirectoryTo access directory feature. There are the following three types of directoryfeatures: Personal Directory, Phonebook and Corporate Directory. Thischapter explains the menu list for Personal Directory feature.

Setting To access user settings.

Phone To move to the default home screen.

Menu

Menu

Page 246: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

238

For firmware version before 5.0.0.0.

Menu Press key while indicating the current time on LCD.

History To view call history data. Also, you can add the history data to the directory.

Directory To access directory feature. There are the following three types of directory features: Personal Directory, Phonebook and Corporate Directory. This chapter explains the menu list for Personal Directory feature.

Tool Uses when accessing external XML server. For details, please contact the system administrator.

Call Func. Not used.

Setting To access user settings.

Presence Not used.

Favorite Not used.

Config To make the configuration setting of DT Series. For details, please contact the system administrator.

Menu Item Description

Menu

Page 247: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

S

F played.F ayed.

lueS

y

239

enu List For History

ubMenu

or the firmware version 5.0.0.0 and later, press Option soft key or HELP key while the history data is disor the firmware version before 5.0.0.0, press Option soft key or key while the history data is displ

Menu Item Description Default Value

History

1 Missed Displays the history of missed calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

2 Outgoing Displays the history of outgoing calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

3 Incoming Displays the history of incoming calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

4 Delete All Deletes all the history data. -

Menu Item Description Default VaubMenu

1 Call Make a call to the currently displayed party. -2 Directory Add Add the currently displayed history data to the personal directory. -

1 New Add call history data to the personal directory. -Category Set Select Company, Mobile, Voice Mail, Home or Others. CompanPriority Flag Select either Enable or Disable. DisableEdit Edit the directory data. -

2 Addition Edit the personal directory data from call history. -Directory Search Search the personal directory. -

Directory Register the telephone number to the searched directory data. -3 Prefix Add Prefix to the telephone number and then make a call. -4 Delete One Delete a specific data. -5 Delete All Delete all history data of a specific call type (“missed”, “outgoing”

or “incoming”)-

Menu

Page 248: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

lueD

y

ws gs)

ws gs)

240

enu List For Directory

Menu Item Description Default Vairectory From Menu screen, select Directory → Personal. -

1 Personal Displays the Directory controlled by the telephone.1 Search Search the personal directory. -

1 Group Select a group as a search condition. -

2 Name Enter the target name and perform a search. -3 Tel Number Enter the target telephone number and perform a search. -4 Other Perform a search by one of the following conditions. -

1 Memory ID Enter a memory number. -

2 Category Select a category. -3 Company Enter a company name. -

4 Alphabet Select a group of alphabets. -2 Edit Add a new data to the personal directory. -

1 Name Enter a name of the target party to be added to the directory. -

2 Group Select a group to which the target party belongs. Default

3-6 Tel #1-Tel #4 Enter the telephone number. -

Category Set Select Company, Mobile, Voice Mail, Home or Others. Compan

Priority Flag Select either Enable or Disable. Disable7 Company Name Enter the company name of the target party. -

8 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone type per caller.Default (follogroup settin

Note 19 Illumination Select a illumination pattern (color) of the call indication lamp. Default (follo

group settin Note 1

0 Memory ID Enter a memory number to be assigned to the target party. -

2 1

Page 249: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Note

M

Note

lue

ws t-

ws t-

lue

T

241

1: For firmware versions before 5.0.0.0, the default is “Automatic.”

enu List For Tool

: Tools are not supported at the firmware version 5.0.0.0 and later.

Menu Item Description Default Va3 Group Setting Change a group name. -

1. Default

Select a desired group name to be changed. -

2. Colleagues3. VIPs4. Family5. Friends6. Group 6 - 20. Group 20

1 Name Enter a new group name. -2 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone type per group. Default (follo

terminal setings)

Note 13 Illumination Select a illumination pattern (color) of the call indication lamp. Default (follo

terminal setings)

Note 14 Own Number Displays the number of the telephone itself. -0 Delete All Delete all the registered directory data. -

2 System Displays the Directory controlled by the system.3 Corporate Displays the Directory controlled by the external XML server.

Menu Item Description Default Va

ool

1 Service Activate XML browser. -

2 IM Not used. -

Page 250: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

e

)

-

242

enu List For Setting

Menu Item Description Default ValuSetting

1 User Setting Make the user setting of DT Series.

1 Incoming Call Settings for incoming call.

1 Ring Volume Not used. -

2 Offhook Ring Enable/Disable Off-hook ringing. Enable

3 Headset Ring Enable/Disable the ringing of headset. Disable

4 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone for External Call and Internal Call.(Automatic / Tone Type 1~14 / Download 1~3)

Automatic(Tone Type1

5 Illumination Set the illumination pattern for External Call and Internal Call.(Automatic / Disable / Red / Green / Blue / Yellow / PurpleLight Blue / White / Rotation)

Automatic(Red)

6 Headset Ring Vol-ume

Not used. -

2 Talk Settings for telephone conversation.

1 RTP Alarm Enable/disable RTP alarm. Automatic

2 DTMF Tone Enable/disable DTMF tone. Automatic

3 Key Touch Tone Set key touch tone generated when the digit keys are pressed while the telephone is off-hook. Automatic

4 Hold Music Select a Music on Hold to be heard by DT Series user. Default

5 Prefix Register Prefix number. -

3 Display Settings for LCD display. -

1 Time Format Determines whether time is displayed with a 12-hour or 24-hour clock format.

Automatic (12hour format)

2 Local Volume Determines whether or not to display the following volume levels: handset receiver volume, speaker volume, ringer tone volume and LCD contrast.

Automatic (Enable)

Page 251: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

t)

e

243

3 Screen Saver Sets Screen Saver related data. -

1 Screen Saver Mode

Enable/Disable Screen Saver.Disable

2 Wait Time Set the Wait Time to launch Screen Saver 120min

4 Back Light Enable/disable the backlights of LCD and digit keys. Automatic (Enable)

5 Font Size Change the displayed character size on the LCD. Standard(16do

6 Language Select a language to be displayed on LCD. Automatic

4 Change Password Change the password to lock/unlock the telephone. 0000

5 Security Not used. -

6 Peripherals Not used -

7. Usability Note 1 Set the operation of Help key while pop-up window is dis-played. -

1.Help Key Mode Setting for Help Key Mode (SubMenu/Popup Window) SubMenu

0 Setting Reset Reset the telephone settings. -

Menu Item Description Default Valu

Page 252: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Note

tgz

tgz

e

244

1: Supported from Firmware version 5.0.0.0 and later.

2 Download Set the data required for the file downloading. -

1 Download Files Download the files for Music on Hold, ringer tone and -

1 Hold Music Download a file for Music on Hold. MOH.wav

2 Ring Tone Download files for ringer tones -

1. Download 1 Download files for ringer tone (Download 1). Melody1.wav

2. Download 2 Download files for ringer tone (Download 2). Melody2.wav

3. Download 3 Download files for ringer tone (Download 3). Melody3.wav

3 Directory Download the directory files. Directory.csv

2 Download Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

3 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

4 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for downloading via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for downloading via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the directory where the download file is stored. -

3 Data Backup/Restore Set the data required for the file backup/restore. -

1 Data Backup Specify the file name to be backed up. PersonalData.

2 Data Restore Specify the file name to be restored. PersonalData.

3 Server Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

4 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

5 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for the data backup via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for data backup via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the destination directory of FTP server. -

Menu Item Description Default Valu

Page 253: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

ME

245

NU LIST FOR ITL-8LDE-1

Menu Item Description

For firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later with a Home URL registered.

Menu Press to display the Menu screen.

History To view Call History data. Also, you can add the history data to the directory.

DirectoryTo access directory feature. There are the following three types of directoryfeatures: Personal Directory, Phonebook and Corporate Directory. Thischapter explains the menu list for Personal Directory feature.

Service To display XML application screen registered in the service URL.

Setting To access user settings.

Portal To display XML application screen registered in the home URL.

For firmware version 5.0.0.0 or later without a Home URL registered.

Menu Press to display the Menu screen.

History To view Call History data. Also, you can add the history data to the directory.

DirectoryTo access directory feature. There are the following three types of directoryfeatures: Personal Directory, Phonebook and Corporate Directory. Thischapter explains the menu list for Personal Directory feature.

Setting To access user settings.

Phone To move to the default home screen.

Menu

Menu

Page 254: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

S

lueS

y

246

enu List For History

ubMenu

Menu Item Description Default Value

History

1 Missed Displays the history of missed calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

2 Outgoing Displays the history of outgoing calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

3 Incoming Displays the history of incoming calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

4 Delete All Deletes all the history data. -

Menu Item Description Default VaubMenu

1 Call Make a call to the currently displayed party. -2 Directory Add Add the currently displayed history data to the personal directory. -

1 New Add call history data to the personal directory. -Category Set Select Company, Mobile, Voice Mail, Home or Others. CompanPriority Flag Select either Enable or Disable. DisableEdit Edit the directory data. -

2 Addition Edit the personal directory data from call history. -Directory Search Search the personal directory. -

Directory Register the telephone number to the searched directory data. -3 Prefix Add Prefix to the telephone number and then make a call. -4 Delete One Delete a specific data. -5 Delete All Delete all history data of a specific call type (“missed”, “outgoing”

or “incoming”)-

Page 255: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

lueD

y

ws gs)ws gs)

247

enu List For Directory

Menu Item Description Default Vairectory From Menu screen, select Directory → Personal. -

1 Personal Displays the Directory controlled by the telephone.1 Search Search the personal directory. -

1 Group Select a group as a search condition. -

2 Name Enter the target name and perform a search. -3 Tel Number Enter the target telephone number and perform a search. -4 Other Perform a search by one of the following conditions. -

1 Memory ID Enter a memory number. -

2 Category Select a category. -3 Company Enter a company name. -

4 Alphabet Select a group of alphabets. -2 Edit Add a new data to the personal directory. -

1 Name Enter a name of the target party to be added to the directory. -

2 Group Select a group to which the target party belongs. Default

3-6 Tel #1-Tel #4 Enter the telephone number. -

Category Set Select Company, Mobile, Voice Mail, Home or Others. Compan

Priority Flag Select either Enable or Disable. Disable7 Company Name Enter the company name of the target party. -

8 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone type per caller. Default (follogroup settin

9 Illumination Select a illumination pattern (color) of the call indication lamp. Default (follogroup settin

0 Memory ID Enter a memory number to be assigned to the target party. -

2 1

Page 256: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

lue

ws t-

ws t-

248

Menu Item Description Default Va3 Group Setting Change a group name. -

1. Default

Select a desired group name to be changed. -

2. Colleagues3. VIPs4. Family5. Friends6. Group 6 - 20. Group 20

1 Name Enter a new group name. -2 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone type per group. Default (follo

terminal setings)

3 Illumination Select a illumination pattern (color) of the call indication lamp. Default (folloterminal se

tings)4 Own Number Displays the number of the telephone itself. -0 Delete All Delete all the registered directory data. -

2 System Displays the Directory controlled by the system.3 Corporate Displays the Directory controlled by the external XML server.

Page 257: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

e

)

-

249

enu List For Setting

Menu Item Description Default ValuSetting

1 User Setting Make the user setting of DT Series.

1 Incoming Call Settings for incoming call.

1 Ring Volume Not used. -

2 Offhook Ring Enable/Disable Off-hook ringing. Enable

3 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone for External Call and Internal Call.(Automatic / Tone Type 1~14 / Download 1~3)

Automatic(Tone Type1

4 Illumination Set the illumination pattern for External Call and Internal Call.(Automatic / Disable / Red / Green / Orange / Rotation)

Automatic(Red)

5 Headset Ring Vol-ume

Not used. -

2 Talk Settings for telephone conversation.

1 RTP Alarm Enable/disable RTP alarm. Automatic

2 DTMF Tone Enable/disable DTMF tone. Automatic

3 Key Touch Tone Set key touch tone generated when the digit keys are pressed while the telephone is off-hook. Automatic

4 Hold Music Select a Music on Hold to be heard by DT Series user. Default

5 Prefix Register Prefix number. -

3 Display Settings for LCD display. -

1 Time Format Determines whether time is displayed with a 12-hour or 24-hour clock format.

Automatic (12hour format)

2 Local Volume Determines whether or not to display the following volume levels: handset receiver volume, speaker volume, ringer tone volume and LCD contrast.

Automatic (Enable)

Page 258: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

t)

e

250

3 Screen Saver Sets Screen Saver related data. -

1 Screen Saver Mode

Enable/Disable Screen Saver.Disable

2 Wait Time Set the Wait Time to launch Screen Saver 120min

4 Back Light Enable/disable the backlights of LCD and digit keys. Automatic (Enable)

5 Font Size Change the displayed character size on the LCD. Standard(16do

6 Language Select a language to be displayed on LCD. Automatic7 Home View Mode Note 1

Sets whether to switch both menu window and DESI-less screen. Automatic

4 Change Password Change the password to lock/unlock the telephone. 0000

5 Security Not used. -

6 Peripherals Not used -

7. Usability Set the operation of Help key while pop-up window is dis-played. -

1.Help Key Mode Setting for Help Key Mode (1 SubMenu/2 Popup Window) SubMenu

0 Setting Reset Reset the telephone settings. -

Menu Item Description Default Valu

Page 259: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Note

tgz

tgz

e

251

1: Home View Mode is supported for ITL-8LDE-1 only.

2 Download Set the data required for the file downloading. -

1 Download Files Download the files for Music on Hold, ringer tone and -

1 Hold Music Download a file for Music on Hold. MOH.wav

2 Ring Tone Download files for ringer tones -

1. Download 1 Download files for ringer tone (Download 1). Melody1.wav

2. Download 2 Download files for ringer tone (Download 2). Melody2.wav

3. Download 3 Download files for ringer tone (Download 3). Melody3.wav

3 Directory Download the directory files. Directory.csv

2 Download Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

3 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

4 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for downloading via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for downloading via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the directory where the download file is stored. -

3 Data Backup/Restore Set the data required for the file backup/restore. -

1 Data Backup Specify the file name to be backed up. PersonalData.

2 Data Restore Specify the file name to be restored. PersonalData.

3 Server Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

4 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

5 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for the data backup via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for data backup via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the destination directory of FTP server. -

Menu Item Description Default Valu

Page 260: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

ME

M

252

NU LIST FOR DT710 Series

enu List For Tool

Menu Item Description

Menu Press key while indicating the current time on LCD.

Tool Not used.

Setting To make the user setting of DT Series.

Config To make the configuration setting of DT Series. For details, please contact the system administrator.

Menu Item Description Default Value

1 Tool

1 ---------------------- Not used. -

Menu

1

2

0

1

Page 261: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

M

e

)

-

253

enu List For Setting

Menu Item Description Default Valu2 Setting

1 User Setting Make the user setting of DT Series.

1 Incoming Call Settings for incoming call.

1 Offhook Ring Enable/Disable Off-hook ringing. Enable

2 Ring Tone Select a ringer tone for External Call and Internal Call.Automatic / Tone Type 1~14

Automatic(Tone Type1

3 Headset Ring Vol-ume

Not used. -

2 Talk Settings for telephone conversation.

1 RTP Alarm Enable/disable RTP alarm. Automatic

2 DTMF Tone Enable/disable DTMF tone. Automatic

3 Key Touch Tone Set key touch tone generated when the digit keys are pressed while the telephone is off-hook. Automatic

4 Hold Music Select a Music on Hold to be heard by DT Series user. Default

3 Display Settings for LCD display. -

1 Time Format Determines whether time is displayed with a 12-hour or 24-hour clock format.

Automatic (12hour format)

2 Local Volume Determines whether or not to display the following volume levels: handset receiver volume, speaker volume, ringer tone volume and LCD contrast.

Automatic (Enable)

3 Screen Saver Sets Screen Saver related data. -

1 Screen Saver Mode

Enable/Disable Screen Saver.Disable

2 Wait Time Set the Wait Time to launch Screen Saver 120min

4 Language Select a language to be displayed on LCD. Automatic

4 Change Password Change the password to lock/unlock the telephone. 0000

0 Setting Reset Reset the telephone settings. -

2 Download Set the data required for the file downloading. -

2

Page 262: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

tgz

tgz

e

254

1 Download Files Download the files for Music on Hold, ringer tone and -

1 Hold Music Download a file for Music on Hold. MOH.wav

2 Download Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

3 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

4 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for downloading via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for downloading via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the directory where the download file is stored. -

3 Data Backup/Restore Set the data required for the file backup/restore. -

1 Data Backup Specify the file name to be backed up. PersonalData.

2 Data Restore Specify the file name to be restored. PersonalData.

3 Server Address Enter an IP address of the FTP/TFTP server. 0.0.0.0

4 Protocol Select a protocol of the server (either FTP or TFTP). FTP

5 FTP Settings Set necessary data when using FTP service. -

1 User ID Enter a user ID for the data backup via FTP server. -

2 Password Enter a password for data backup via FTP server. -

3 Folder Specify the destination directory of FTP server. -

Menu Item Description Default Valu

Page 263: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

ME

M

255

NU LIST FOR DT330 Series

enu List For Call History

Menu Item Description

Menu Press key while indicating the current time on LCD.

Call History To view call history data.

Directory To access Phonebook feature. For details, see PHONEBOOK in chapter 5.

Settings To make the user setting of DT Series.

Menu Item Description Default Value

1 Call History

1 Incoming Displays the history of incoming calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

3 Outgoing Displays the history of outgoing calls. You can also make a call from this menu. -

Menu

1

2

3

1

Page 264: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

256

This page is for your notes.

Page 265: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

1OUWeb rowser(Inte licationsoftw

N

N ng thee net-

N

257

0.WEB PROGRAMMING

TLINE Programming allows you to configure the terminal settings of DT Series from the PC. An Internet brnet Explorer, etc.) is used to access Web Programming. It is not necessary to install any special appare onto the PC.

PC Requirements For Web Programming

ote: This feature is only available for DT700 Series.

ote: DT700 Series and Web Programming PC needs to be connected to the same network. When downloadifiles for Music on Hold, Ringer Tone and Directory to the DT Series, FTP (TFTP server) is required on thwork. For details on the FTP service, contact the System Administrator.

ote: Terminal settings through the Web Programming is available while the DT700 Series logs into the system.

Items Operating Conditions

Operating System Microsoft® Windows® XP/Vista/Windows® 7CPU Comply with conditions for use of Microsoft® Windows or Micro-

soft® Internet Explorer.Memory

Browser Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

Monitor SVGA (minimum: 800 × 600 pixel, recommended: 1024 × 768 pixel,)

Others Mouse, LAN connection port (RJ-45)

Page 266: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOFollo

STE

STE

STE ote 1),

N efault

258

LOGINw the steps below to open the Web Programming.

P 1: Start up Internet browser on the PC.

P 2: Enter IP address of the target DT700 Series on the address toolbar and then press Enter key.

P 3: The Web Programming Login screen appears. Enter a user name (type “USER”) and a password (Nthen click .

ote: Enter the same password used when logging into the DT700 Series. “0000” is used as password by the dsetting.

OK

Page 267: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

NN oblem

259

P 4: The following Web Programming Home screen appears.

ote: For IP address of DT Series, contact the System Administrator.

ote: When the login screen does not appear, check the LAN connection status and entered IP address. If the prpersists, please contact the system administrator.

Page 268: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

TOFollo

STE

STE

STE

260

LOGOUTw the steps below to exit the Web Programming.

P 1: Click at the lower left of the screen.

P 2: The confirmation message appears. Click to log out of Web Programming.

P 3: The display changes as follows. Click .

Logout

OK

Back

Page 269: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

STE

Not

Not

261

P 4: After the Web Programming Login screen is displayed, close the Internet browser.

e: Make sure to perform the logout operation after the data setting of the telephone.

e: When 15 minutes have passed leaving the PC without operation after log in to Web Programming, youare forcibly logged out from the Web Programming.

Page 270: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

HO

As a tone forexter al. Fordeta

STE

STE

STE

STE

262

W TO OPERATE

n example of setting method on the Web Programming, the following explains how to change the ringer nal call. Web Programming includes the same menu configuration as "Setting" of DT700 Series termin

ils on each menu item, see SETUP WITH MENU KEY FOR DT700 SERIES in 3.TERMINAL SETUP.

P 1: From the Home screen, click User Setting → Incoming Call → Ring Tone → External Call.P 2: Select a desired tone type by clicking the corresponding radio button.

P 3: Click to save the change to the database.

P 4: A confirmation dialog appears. Click on the dialog.

OK

STEP 1: Click items to navigate through the menu.

STEP 3: Click OK button

STEP 2: Click the radio button to select a parameter.

Click Logout button to exitfrom the Web Programming. to accept the selection.

OK

Page 271: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0

Printed in Japan1108-050

Page 272: DT730/710/330/310 User’s Guide - Vanderbilt IT · PDF fileDT730/DT710/DT330/DT310 USER’S GUIDE NEC Corporation 2011 August NWA-039300-001 ISSUE 5.0